,'.'' ,'0''sdb/modspecs/2012/physmod...lec 15&16 wk 9 damped and...

103
!"#$%&'"(& *+ ,-./01/ 2*345" 6#"1071$8*(/ 9:;9<;= !"#$%&$ ( ()*+,-$ ./0.102 !" " !# # !" " !# # !" " !# # 3-4-, 0 $%&!"'" ()*+,-./- 12-/3.45 3-4-, 2 $%&!67' $825.45 9,: ()* ;)48-,<,=2 $:,>)4+ 3-4-, ( $%&!?@A BCD/-4)C $:/4+.4/< $825.45 EF$825G $%&!"'# ;8) F/+):./< H-.D):5) $%&!67" IJ/-+J3 F)48/-.45 /-C B+,3.4 $825.45 $%&!?A' BCD/-4)C IJ/-+J3 $825.45 $%&!"'6 K/D) $8)-,3)-/ $%&!67# BCD/-4)C LM5):D/+.,-/< B5+:,-,32 $%&!?A" B44)<):/+,: $825.45 $%&!"'? 9,J-C/+.,-5 ,N F,C):- $825.45 $%&!676 O,-C)-5)C F/++): $825.45 $%&!?A? P<)3)-+5 ,N !+)<</: 12-/3.45 $%&!"'Q K,:R.-= *.+8 $825.45 S $%&!6@' BCD/-4)C P<)4+:,3/=-)+.53 $%&!?AQ $825.45 ,N +8) T/C./+.D) H-.D):5) $%&!"'7 $:/4+.4/< $825.45 S $%&!6@6 U/</V.)5 $%&!?AA F,C)<<.-= $825.4/< $8)-,3)-/ $%&!"'@ F/+8)3/+.45 N,: $825.4.5+5 S $%&!6@? T)</+.D.+2 /-C O,53,<,=2 $%&!?W' BCD/-4)C (J4<)/: $825.45 $%&!"'A F/+8)3/+.45 N,: $825.4.5+5 SS $%&!6@Q (J4<)/: $825.45 $%&!?W" T)5)/:48 !R.<<5 $%&!""Q K,:R.-= *.+8 F)C.4/< $825.45 S $%&!6@@ S-+:,CJ4+.,- ;, $/:+.4<) $825.45 $%&!?W6 BCD/-4)C $/:+.4<) $825.45 $%&!"6Q K,:R.-= *.+8 (J4<)/: !4.)-4) S $%&!6@A BCD/-4)C $:/4+.4/< $825.45 EX!4G $%&!?W? O,3YJ+/+.,-/< B5+:,Y825.45 $%&!"67 S-+:,CJ4+.,- +, F)C.4/< $825.45 $%&!6@W $:,>)4+ EX!4G $%&!?WQ ;8) S-+):5+)<</: F)C.J3 $%&!"6@ Z.5J/< LY+.45 S $%&!6A" !J:N/4) $825.45 $%&!?W7 O,33J-.4/+.,- ,N B5+:,Y825.4/< SC)/5 $%&!"Q7 $:/4+.4/< !R.<<5 N,: F/+8)3/+.4/< $825.45 $%&!6A# $825.45 ,N [.N) $%&!?W@ F/=-)+.4 !+:J4+J:) /-C 9J-4+.,- $%&!6A6 9J:+8): !+)<</: B5+:,Y825.45 $%&!?WA $:,>)4+ EF$825G $%&!6A? T/C./+.,- ;8):/Y2 BYY<.4/+.,-5 $%&!?WW (/-,54/<) $825.45 /-C ;)48-,<,=2 3-4-, . $%&!#'" P<)4+:,3/=-)+.53 $%&!6A7 F)C.4/< $825.45 $:,>)4+ $%&!#'# O,-C)-5)C F/++): $825.45 $%&!6A@ F/+):./<5 $825.45 $%&!#'6 IJ/-+J3 /-C B+,3.4 $825.45 $%&!6AA $825.45 ,N P-):=2 !,J:4)5 $%&!#'? (J4<)/: /-C $/:+.4<) $825.45 $%&!6AW !)3.4,-CJ4+,: BYY<.4/+.,-5 $%&!#'Q K,:R.-= *.+8 $825.45 SS $%&!6W" O,33J-.4/+.-= !4.)-4) $%&!#'7 $:/4+.4/< $825.45 SS $%&!6W# !+/+.5+.45 S- 1/+/ B-/<25.5 \ \ $%&!#'@ F/+8)3/+.45 N,: $825.4.5+5 SSS $%&!6W6 !+/+.5+.4/< /-C [,* ;)3Y):/+J:) $825.45 [)D)< " " "6 "6 $%&!#'A F/+8)3/+.45 N,: $825.4.5+5 SZ $%&!6W? LM5):D/+.,-/< B5+:,-,32 # # "" "" $%&!#"7 $:/4+.4/< B5+:,Y825.45 $%&!6WQ BYY<.)C $825.45 $:,>)4+ 6 6 #7 #7 $%&!#6@ Z.5J/< LY+.45 SS $%&!6W7 H-C):=:/CJ/+) B3M/55/C,:5 $:,>)4+ F F "Q "Q $%&!#?7 B44)<):/+,:5 /-C T/C.,.5,+,Y)5 .- F)C.4.-) $%&!6WA (J4<)/: !4.)-4) $:,>)4+ 5 5)67 7, 89 89 !1 1X L L4+ #'" "#

Upload: others

Post on 22-Feb-2020

2 views

Category:

Documents


0 download

TRANSCRIPT

Page 1: ,'.'' ,'0''sdb/ModSpecs/2012/PHYSmod...Lec 15&16 Wk 9 Damped and Forced Harmonic Oscillator Resonance PC 8 Wk 9 Demonstration Experiment, Prediction and Writeup Lec 17&18 Wk 10 Gravitation

!"#$%&'"(&)*+),-./01/

2*345")6#"1071$8*(/

9:;9<;=

!"#$%&$'()*+,-$'./0.102

!"#$%&$'()*+,-$'./0.102

!"!"!#!#

!"!"!#!#

!"!"!#!#

3-4-,'0''$%&!"'"

()*

+,-./-012-/3.45

3-4-,'2''$%&!67'

$825.4509,:0()*

0;)48-,<,=20$:,>)4+3-4-,'(

''$%&!?@A

BCD/-4)C0$:/4+.4/<0$825.450EF$825G

$%&!"'#;8)0F

/+):./<0H-.D):5)

$%&!67"IJ/-+J3

0F)48/-.450/-C0B+,3

.40$825.45$%&!?A'

BCD/-4)C0IJ/-+J3

0$825.45$%&!"'6

K/D)0$8)-,3

)-/$%&!67#

BCD/-4)C0LM5):D/+.,-/<0B5+:,-,3

2$%&!?A"

B44)<):/+,:0$825.45$%&!"'?

9,J-C/+.,-50,N0F,C):-0$825.45

$%&!676O,-C)-5)C0F

/++):0$825.45$%&!?A?

P<)3)-+50,N0!+)<</:012-/3

.45$%&!"'Q

K,:R.-=0*

.+80$825.450S$%&!6@'

BCD/-4)C0P<)4+:,3/=-)+.53

$%&!?AQ$825.450,N0+8)0T/C./+.D)0H

-.D):5)$%&!"'7

$:/4+.4/<0$825.450S$%&!6@6

U/</V.)5$%&!?AA

F,C)<<.-=0$825.4/<0$8)-,3

)-/$%&!"'@

F/+8)3

/+.450N,:0$825.4.5+50S$%&!6@?

T)</+.D.+20/-C0O,53,<,=2

$%&!?W'BCD/-4)C0(

J4<)/:0$825.45$%&!"'A

F/+8)3

/+.450N,:0$825.4.5+50SS$%&!6@Q

(J4<)/:0$825.45

$%&!?W"T)5)/:480!R.<<5

$%&!""QK,:R.-=0*

.+80F)C.4/<0$825.450S

$%&!6@@S-+:,CJ4+.,-0;,0$/:+.4<)0$825.45

$%&!?W6BCD/-4)C0$/:+.4<)0$825.45

$%&!"6QK,:R.-=0*

.+80(J4<)/:0!4.)-4)0S

$%&!6@ABCD/-4)C0$:/4+.4/<0$825.450EX!4G

$%&!?W?O,3

YJ+/+.,-/<0B5+:,Y825.45$%&!"67

S-+:,CJ4+.,-0+,0F)C.4/<0$825.45

$%&!6@W$:,>)4+0EX!4G

$%&!?WQ;8)0S-+):5+)<</:0F

)C.J3$%&!"6@

Z.5J/<0LY+.450S

$%&!6A"!J:N/4)0$825.45

$%&!?W7O,3

3J-.4/+.,-0,N0B5+:,Y825.4/<0SC)/5

$%&!"Q7$:/4+.4/<0!R.<<50N,:0F

/+8)3/+.4/<0$825.45

$%&!6A#$825.450,N0[.N)

$%&!?W@F/=-)+.40!+:J4+J:)0/-C09J-4+.,-

$%&!6A69J:+8):0!+)<</:0B5+:,Y825.45

$%&!?WA$:,>)4+0EF

$825G$%&!6A?

T/C./+.,-0;8):/Y20BYY<.4/+.,-5$%&!?WW

(/-,54/<)0$825.450/-C0;)48-,<,=2

3-4-,'.''$%&!#'"

P<)4+:,3/=-)+.53

$%&!6A7F)C.4/<0$825.450$:,>)4+

$%&!#'#O,-C)-5)C0F

/++):0$825.45$%&!6A@

F/+):./<50$825.45

$%&!#'6IJ/-+J3

0/-C0B+,3.40$825.45

$%&!6AA$825.450,N0P-):=20!,J:4)5

$%&!#'?(J4<)/:0/-C0$/:+.4<)0$825.45

$%&!6AW!)3

.4,-CJ4+,:0BYY<.4/+.,-5$%&!#'Q

K,:R.-=0*

.+80$825.450SS$%&!6W"

O,33J-.4/+.-=0!4.)-4)

$%&!#'7$:/4+.4/<0$825.450SS

$%&!6W#!+/+.5+.450S-01/+/0B-/<25.5

\\$%&!#'@

F/+8)3

/+.450N,:0$825.4.5+50SSS$%&!6W6

!+/+.5+.4/<0/-C0[,*0;)3

Y):/+J:)0$825.45[)D)<

"""6"6

$%&!#'AF/+8)3

/+.450N,:0$825.4.5+50SZ$%&!6W?

LM5):D/+.,-/<0B5+:,-,3

2##

""""$%&!#"7

$:/4+.4/<0B5+:,Y825.45$%&!6WQ

BYY<.)C0$825.450$:,>)4+66

#7#7$%&!#6@

Z.5J/<0LY+.450SS

$%&!6W7H-C):=:/CJ/+)0B3

M/55/C,:50$:,>)4+FF

"Q"Q$%&!#?7

B44)<):/+,:50/-C0T/C.,.5,+,Y)50.-0F)C.4.-)

$%&!6WA(J4<)/:0!4.)-4)0$:,>)4+

5)67,'''5)67,'''5)67,'''

8989

!1X00L4+0#'"#0

!1X00L4+0#'"#0

!1X00L4+0#'"#0

!1X00L4+0#'"#0

!1X00L4+0#'"#0

Page 2: ,'.'' ,'0''sdb/ModSpecs/2012/PHYSmod...Lec 15&16 Wk 9 Damped and Forced Harmonic Oscillator Resonance PC 8 Wk 9 Demonstration Experiment, Prediction and Writeup Lec 17&18 Wk 10 Gravitation

MODULE SPECIFICATION

The information contained in this module specification was correct at the time of publication but may be subject tochange, either during the session because of unforeseen circumstances, or following review of the module at theend of the session. Queries about the module should be directed to the member of staff with responsibility for themodule.

1. Module Title PHYSICS ICEBREAKER PROJECT

2. Module Code PHYS100

3. Year 201213

4. OriginatingDepartment

Physics

5. Faculty Fac of Science & Engineering

6. Semester Whole Session

7. Credit Level Level One

8. Credit Value 0

9. External Examiner Physics External Examiner

10. Member of staff withresponsibility for themodule

Prof R Herzberg Physics [email protected]

11. Module Moderator

12. Other ContributingDepartments

13. Other Staff Teachingon this Module

Dr SD Barrett Physics [email protected] BT King Physics [email protected]

14. Board of Studies Physics

15. Mode of Delivery Lectures/Seminars/Workshops

16. Location Main Liverpool City Campus

Lectures Seminars Tutorials Lab/Practicals Fieldwork/Placement Other TOTAL

17. ContactHours

4In Week 1only

27Project sessions inWeek 1 only

31

18. Non-contact hours 619. TOTAL HOURS 37

Lectures Seminars Tutorials Lab/Practicals Fieldwork/Placement Other

20. Timetable(if known)

4x1 hour Lecturesduring Week 1

9 x 3 hourProject Sessionsduring Week 1

21. Pre-requisites before taking this module (other modules and/or general educational/academic requirements):

Physics A Level (or equivalent)

22. Modules for which this module is a pre-requisite:

None

23. Co-requisite modules:

None

24. Linked Modules:

25. Programme(s) (including Year of Study) to which this module is available on a mandatory basis:

26. Programme(s) (including Year of Study) to which this module is available on a required basis:

F300 (1) F303 (1) F352 (1) F350 (1) F3F5 (1) F521 (1) F390 (1)

27. Programme(s) (including Year of Study) to which this module is available on an optional basis:

MODULE DESCRIPTION

28. Aims

Establish an open ended and integrated approach to problem solvingIntroduce the whole Physics courseFacilitate integration of the student cohortEstablish a working pattern of full days plus homeworkEstablish a habit of conscientious attendanceCreate a manned mission to Mars

29. Learning Outcomes

At the end of the module the student should:

Become familiar with teamwork & problem driven learningBecome familiar with research methods

30. Teaching and Learning Strategies

The Icebreaker project will consist of a combination of lectures and problems classes. and will run full time inWeek 1. The main emphasis is on project work, although mathematical foundations and an introduction to themain e-learning tools are part of the project.

Teams work in teams of five groups each, with each group working on a different aspect of the project.

Students are also expected to complete further problems as exercises on an individual basis using MasteringPhysics online Problems; these are marked and feedback is provided through Mastering Physics. Theintellectual focus will be on becoming familiar with the system.

31. Syllabus

Week 1 Project Mission to Mars

The overall mission is divided into five aspects:

1. Mission Length and Trajectory2. Landing Craft and Re-Entry3. Radiation and Heat Shielding4. Mass Management and Launch5. Communications and Life Support

32. Recommended Texts

Handbook of space technology. Wilfried Ley, Klaus Wittmann, Willi Hallmann (editors). Wiley, 2009.

ASSESSMENT

33. EXAM Duration Timing(Semester)

% of finalmark

Resit/resubmissionopportunity

Penalty for latesubmission

Notes

Page 3: ,'.'' ,'0''sdb/ModSpecs/2012/PHYSmod...Lec 15&16 Wk 9 Damped and Forced Harmonic Oscillator Resonance PC 8 Wk 9 Demonstration Experiment, Prediction and Writeup Lec 17&18 Wk 10 Gravitation

34. CONTINUOUS Duration Timing(Semester)

% of finalmark

Resit/resubmissionopportunity

Penalty for latesubmission

Notes

None Continuous Pass/Fail This module is notcredit bearing

MODULE SPECIFICATION

The information contained in this module specification was correct at the time of publication but may be subject tochange, either during the session because of unforeseen circumstances, or following review of the module at the end ofthe session. Queries about the module should be directed to the member of staff with responsibility for the module.

1. Module Title NEWTONIAN DYNAMICS

2. Module Code PHYS101

3. Year 201213

4. OriginatingDepartment

Physics

5. Faculty Fac of Science & Engineering

6. Semester First Semester

7. Credit Level Level One

8. Credit Value 15

9. External Examiner Physics External Examiner

10. Member of staff withresponsibility for themodule

Prof R Herzberg Physics [email protected]

11. Module Moderator Dr DS Martin Physics [email protected]

12. Other ContributingDepartments

13. Other Staff Teachingon this Module

Dr HL Vaughan Central Teaching Laboratory [email protected]

14. Board of Studies Physics

15. Mode of Delivery Lectures/Classes

16. Location Main Liverpool City Campus

Lectures Seminars Tutorials Lab/Practicals Fieldwork/Placement Other TOTAL

17. ContactHours

22= 11 x 2lectures/week

22= 11 x 2-hourworkshops

44

18. Non-contact hours 10619. TOTAL HOURS 150

Lectures Seminars Tutorials Lab/Practicals Fieldwork/Placement Other

20. Timetable(if known)

1 2hr (double lecture)slot each week exceptWeek 1

Problem Classes: 12hr slot each weekon a later day thanthe lectures, in anappropriate learningenvironment

21. Pre-requisites before taking this module (other modules and/or general educational/academic requirements):

Physics A Level (or equivalent)

22. Modules for which this module is a pre-requisite:

None

23. Co-requisite modules:

None

24. Linked Modules:

Page 4: ,'.'' ,'0''sdb/ModSpecs/2012/PHYSmod...Lec 15&16 Wk 9 Damped and Forced Harmonic Oscillator Resonance PC 8 Wk 9 Demonstration Experiment, Prediction and Writeup Lec 17&18 Wk 10 Gravitation

25. Programme(s) (including Year of Study) to which this module is available on a mandatory basis:

26. Programme(s) (including Year of Study) to which this module is available on a required basis:

F300 (1) F303 (1) F352 (1) F350 (1) F3F5 (1) F521 (1) F390 (1) F640 (2) F641 (1) F641 (2) F660 (1) F660(2) F656 (1) F656 (2) F640 (1)

27. Programme(s) (including Year of Study) to which this module is available on an optional basis:

MODULE DESCRIPTION

28. Aims

To introduce the fundamental concepts and principles of classical mechanics at an elementary level.To provide an introduction to the study of fluids.To introduce the use of elementary vector algebra in the context of mechanics.

29. Learning Outcomes

At the end of the module the student should be able to:

demonstrate a basic knowledge of the laws of classical mechanics.understand physical quantities with magnitudes, directions (where applicable), units and uncertainties.apply the laws of mechanics to statics, linear motion, motion in a plane, rotational motion, simpleharmonic motion and gravitation.apply conservation laws for energy and momentum to describe collisions.apply conservation of energy to find periods of simple harmonic oscillatior systems.apply mathematical methods, including simple vector algebra, to the study of mechanics.demonstrate an understanding of some aspects of the behaviour of fluids in static and simple dynamicsituations.apply basic mechanical concepts to solve the Kepler problem.

30. Teaching and Learning Strategies

The course will consist of a combination of lectures and problems classes. The lectures are designed to presentstudents withthe main concepts of classical mechanics and illustrate these with reference to simple mechanicalsystems as well as showing how mathematical descriptions of mechanical systems can be developed.

The problems classes give the students the opportunity to investigate further the concepts discussed in thelectures in an environment in which group work is encouraged and expert supervision is available. Theassessment will contain significant elements of peer marking. The intellectual focus is on transfer of knowledgeto new situations and application of physical insights to new problems.

Students are also expected to complete further problems as exercises on an individual basis using MasteringPhysics online Problems; these are marked and feedback is provided through Mastering Physics. The intellectualfocus will be on exercising known material.

31. Syllabus

Overview:

Newton's Laws, Force and Motion, VectorsFriction, DragWork and Kinetic Energy, PowerPotential Energy, Conservation of EnergyForce from Potential, Systems of Particles, Rocket EquationMomentum, CollisionsRotation, Moment of InertiaParallel Axis theorem, Torque, RotationAngular Momentum and its conservationRollingCentre of Percussion, PrecessionSimple Harmonic Motion and Uniform Circular MotionSimple Harmonic Motion, damped and forced SHMNewton's Law of Gravitation

Newton's Law of GravitationSatellites, Escape SpeedKepler's LawsFluids at RestFluids in Motion

Lec 1&2 Wk 2 What is Physics?UnitsSignificant FiguresMeasurementExperimental Science

PC 1 Wk 2 Working with Physical ObservablesDesigning Experiments as questions to nature

Lec 3&4 Wk 3 Reference FramesNewton's LawsSimple Motion with constant AccelerationCentre of MassFriction

PC 2 Wk 3 Demonstration Experiment, Prediction and Writeup

Lec 5&6 Wk 4 WorkEnergyPowerConservation of EnergyConservative Forces

PC 3 Wk 4 Applications of Newton's Laws

Lec 7&8 Wk 5 MomentumConservation of MomentumElastic & Inelastic CollisionsRockets

PC 4 Wk 5 Create PeerWise Multiple Choice questions

Lec 9&10 Wk 6 Circular MotionCentrifugal ForceCoriolis ForceMoment of Inertia

PC 5 Wk 6 CollisionsStaged Rockets

Lec 11&12 Wk 7 Angular MomentumConservation of Angular MomentumRollingTorqueNewton's Laws for Rotations

PC 6 Wk 7 Open ended Problem & Presentation in Class

Lec 13&14 Wk 8 Simple Harmonic MotionSimple and Physical PendulumDamped Harmonic Oscillator

PC 7 Wk 8 RotationsRollingMoments of Inertia

Page 5: ,'.'' ,'0''sdb/ModSpecs/2012/PHYSmod...Lec 15&16 Wk 9 Damped and Forced Harmonic Oscillator Resonance PC 8 Wk 9 Demonstration Experiment, Prediction and Writeup Lec 17&18 Wk 10 Gravitation

Lec 15&16 Wk 9 Damped and Forced Harmonic OscillatorResonance

PC 8 Wk 9 Demonstration Experiment, Prediction and Writeup

Lec 17&18 Wk 10 GravitationMotion under constant acceleration using Calculus

PC 9 Wk 10 Applications of Harmonic MotionUsing Conservation of Energy to derive HO Equation

Lec 19&20 Wk 11 Kepler's LawsSatellitesEscape Velocity

PC 10 Wk 11 Devising PeerWise Multiple Choice or Exam Style Questions

Lec 21&22 Wk 12 Fluids at RestArchimedes PrinciplePascal's LawFluids in MotionBernoulli Equation

PC 11 Wk 12 Kepler's LawsExtrasolar Objects, Hyperbolic and Parabolic OrbitsApplications to interplanetary travel

32. Recommended Texts

"University Physics 12e" by Young and Freedman, published by Pearson Addison-Wesley

Access Code for Mastering Physics required

ASSESSMENT

33. EXAM Duration Timing(Semester)

% of finalmark

Resit/resubmissionopportunity

Penalty for latesubmission

Notes

Written examination 3 hours 1 60 August34. CONTINUOUS Duration Timing

(Semester)% of finalmark

Resit/resubmissionopportunity

Penalty for latesubmission

Notes

Problems set inworkshops

5 x 2hours

1 30 Subsumed by resitexamination

As universitypolicy

This work is notmarked anonymously

Mastering Physicshomeworks

10 x 2hours

1 10 Summer Vacation As universitypolicy

MODULE SPECIFICATION

The information contained in this module specification was correct at the time of publication but may be subject tochange, either during the session because of unforeseen circumstances, or following review of the module at the end ofthe session. Queries about the module should be directed to the member of staff with responsibility for the module.

1. Module Title THE MATERIAL UNIVERSE

2. Module Code PHYS102

3. Year 201213

4. OriginatingDepartment

Physics

5. Faculty Fac of Science & Engineering

6. Semester First Semester

7. Credit Level Level One

8. Credit Value 15

9. External Examiner Physics External Examiner

10. Member of staff withresponsibility for themodule

Dr DE Hutchcroft Physics [email protected]

11. Module Moderator Dr TG Shears Physics [email protected]

12. Other ContributingDepartments

13. Other Staff Teachingon this Module

Dr HL Vaughan Central Teaching Laboratory [email protected]

14. Board of Studies Physics

15. Mode of Delivery Lectures/Classes

16. Location Main Liverpool City Campus

Lectures Seminars Tutorials Lab/Practicals Fieldwork/Placement Other TOTAL

17. ContactHours

22= 11 x 2lectures/week

22= 11 x 2-hourworkshops

44

18. Non-contact hours 10619. TOTAL HOURS 150

Lectures Seminars Tutorials Lab/Practicals Fieldwork/Placement Other

20. Timetable(if known)

1 2hr (double lecture)slot each week exceptWeek 1

Problem Classes: 12hr slot each weekon a later day thanthe lectures, in anappropriate learningenvironment

21. Pre-requisites before taking this module (other modules and/or general educational/academic requirements):

Physics A Level (or equivalent)

22. Modules for which this module is a pre-requisite:

None

23. Co-requisite modules:

None

24. Linked Modules:

Page 6: ,'.'' ,'0''sdb/ModSpecs/2012/PHYSmod...Lec 15&16 Wk 9 Damped and Forced Harmonic Oscillator Resonance PC 8 Wk 9 Demonstration Experiment, Prediction and Writeup Lec 17&18 Wk 10 Gravitation

25. Programme(s) (including Year of Study) to which this module is available on a mandatory basis:

26. Programme(s) (including Year of Study) to which this module is available on a required basis:

F300 (1) F303 (1) F352 (1) F350 (1) F3F5 (1) F521 (1) F390 (1) FG31 (1) F344 (1) FGH1 (1)

27. Programme(s) (including Year of Study) to which this module is available on an optional basis:

MODULE DESCRIPTION

28. Aims

The module aims to make the student familiar with

The concepts of Thermal PhysicsThe zeroth, first and second laws of ThermodynamicsHeat enginesThe kinetic theory of gassesEntropyThe equation of stateVan der Waals equationStates of matter and state changesThe basis of statistical mechanics

29. Learning Outcomes

At the end of the module the student should be able to:

Construct a temperature scale and understand how to calibrate a thermometer with that scaleCalculate the heat flow into and work done by a system and how that is constrained by the first law ofThermodynamicsAnalyses the expected performance of heat engines, heat pumps and refrigeratorsRelate the second law of thermodynamics to the operation of heat engines, particularly the Carnot engineUnderstand the kinetic theory of gases and calculate properties of gasses including the heat capacity andmean free pathExplain the expected behaviour of gasses as a function of their mean free pathUse the theory of equipartition to relate the structure of the molecules to the measured heat capacityCalculate the linear and volume thermal expansions of materialsUnderstand the basis of entropy and relate this to the second law of thermodynamicsRelate the equation of state for a material to the macroscopic properties of the materialUnderstand the PV and PT diagrams for materials and the phase transitions that occur when changing thestate variables for materialsBe able to link the microscopic view of a system to its macroscopic state variables

30. Teaching and Learning Strategies

The course will consist of a combination of lectures and problems classes. The lectures are designed to presentstudents with the main concepts of thermodynamics and illustrate these with reference to physical systemsincluding ideal and real gasses, heat engines, analytic thermodynamics and phase equilibriums.

The problems classes give the students the opportunity to investigate further the concepts discussed in thelectures in an environment in which group work is encouraged and expert supervision is available. Theassessment will contain significant elements of peer marking. The intellectual focus is on transfer of knowledgeto new situations and application of physical insights to new problems.

31. Syllabus

Overview:

Temperature and the zeroth lawHeat and the first law of thermodynamicsThe second law of thermodynamics, reversibility and Carnot enginesThe kinetic theory of gasses, heat capacities, equipartition and the mean freepathVan der Waals equation

Van der Waals equationEntropyThe equations of stateMaxwell relationsParamagnets as thermodynamic systemsStefan's and Wien's LawsPhase transitionsThird law

Lecture 1 & 2 Wk 2 Introduction to the thermal physicsReminder of temperature scalesList the methods of heat transportHeat conduction and heat capacityNewton's law of coolingLatent heats of fusion and vaporisationThermal expansionThermodynamic systemsZeroth law of thermodynamics and thermal equilibriumEnergy in a system

Problem Class 1 Wk 2 An introduction to problem solvingUse heat loss and themal expansion as examples

Lec 3 & 4 Wk 3 First law of thermodynamicsWork done on a system for different constraintsHeat enginesSecond law of thermodynamics: Clausius and Kelvin-PlankReversible processesCarnot Cycle

PC 2 Wk 3 Solve examples of heat engines

Lec 5&6 Wk 4 Absolute temperature scaleConstructing a real temperature scaleKinetic theory of gassesEquipartition of energyHeat capacity of ideal and real gassesMaxwell-Boltzmann distribution (not derived)Heat conductionDiffusion

PC 3 Wk 4 Project in groups on a thermal physics topic, with a verbal presentation at the endof the class

Lec 7&8 Wk 5 EffusionViscosityExamples from kinetic theoryVan der Waal’s equationEntropy (Macroscopic)

PC 4 Wk 5 Examples for real gasses and rates of effusion

Lec 9&10 Wk 6 Clausius inequalityPrinciple of increasing entropyEntropy of an ideal gasBoltzmann DefinitionMaxwell relations and thermodynamic potentialsInternal Energy and heat capacity

PC 5 Wk 6 Review of mathematical relations in partial differentials required to use Maxwell'srelations

Lec 11&12 Wk 7 Enthalpy

Page 7: ,'.'' ,'0''sdb/ModSpecs/2012/PHYSmod...Lec 15&16 Wk 9 Damped and Forced Harmonic Oscillator Resonance PC 8 Wk 9 Demonstration Experiment, Prediction and Writeup Lec 17&18 Wk 10 Gravitation

EnthalpyHelmholtz free energyGibbs free energyApplications of free energiesMaximum available work

PC 6 Wk 7 Tutorial on free energies and entropy calculations

Lec 13&14 Wk 8 Conditions for equilibriumsApplications to PVT systemsDerive relation between heat capacities and compressibiltiesEnergy equationExpansions of gasses: adiabaticJoule-Kelvin expansion of gas and application to liquefaction

PC 7 Wk 8 Research a topic in themodynamics and present in class

Lec 15&16 Wk 9 ParamagnetsCurie and Curie-WeissParamagnetic equation of stateMagnetic coolingEntropy of demagnetisation

PC 8 Wk 9 Work through examples of paramagnets

Lec 17&18 Wk 10 Cavity radiationRadiation as a photon gasWien’s lawStefan’s LawEntropy of radiation

PC 9 Wk 10 Work through a problem based learning example for submission as a groupproject

Lec 19&20 Wk 11 Rubber bands as a thermodynamic systemPhases of matterPVT diagramsEquilibrium condition for two phases

PC 10 Wk 11 Tutorial on phases of matter

Lec 21&22 Wk 12 Clausius-Clapeyron equationFirst and second order phase transitionsThird law of thermodynamicsNernst’s statement

PC 11 Wk 12 Review of material covered in the courseExtra a very condensed version of the notes

32. Recommended Texts

"University Physics" by Young and Freedman, published by Pearson Addison-Wesley

Access Code for Mastering Physics required

"Thermal Physics" Second Edition, by C.B.P. Finn, published by CRC Press

ASSESSMENT

33. EXAM Duration Timing(Semester)

% of finalmark

Resit/resubmissionopportunity

Penalty for latesubmission

Notes

Written examination 3 hours 1 60 August34. CONTINUOUS Duration Timing

(Semester)% of finalmark

Resit/resubmissionopportunity

Penalty for latesubmission

Notes

Problems set inworkshops

5 x 2hours

1 30 Subsumed by resitexamination

As universitypolicy

This work is notmarked anonymously

Mastering PhysicsHomework

5 x 2hours

1 10 Summer Vacation As UniversityPolicy

Page 8: ,'.'' ,'0''sdb/ModSpecs/2012/PHYSmod...Lec 15&16 Wk 9 Damped and Forced Harmonic Oscillator Resonance PC 8 Wk 9 Demonstration Experiment, Prediction and Writeup Lec 17&18 Wk 10 Gravitation

MODULE SPECIFICATION

The information contained in this module specification was correct at the time of publication but may be subject tochange, either during the session because of unforeseen circumstances, or following review of the module at the end ofthe session. Queries about the module should be directed to the member of staff with responsibility for the module.

1. Module Title WAVE PHENOMENA

2. Module Code PHYS103

3. Year 201213

4. OriginatingDepartment

Physics

5. Faculty Fac of Science & Engineering

6. Semester Second Semester

7. Credit Level Level One

8. Credit Value 15

9. External Examiner Physics External Examiner

10. Member of staff withresponsibility for themodule

Dr BT King Physics [email protected]

11. Module Moderator Dr SD Barrett Physics [email protected]

12. Other ContributingDepartments

13. Other Staff Teachingon this Module

Dr HL Vaughan Central Teaching Laboratory [email protected]

14. Board of Studies Physics

15. Mode of Delivery Lectures/Classes

16. Location Main Liverpool City Campus

Lectures Seminars Tutorials Lab/Practicals Fieldwork/Placement Other TOTAL

17. ContactHours

24= 12 x 2lectures/week

24= 12 x 2-hourworkshops

48

18. Non-contact hours 10219. TOTAL HOURS 150

Lectures Seminars Tutorials Lab/Practicals Fieldwork/Placement Other

20. Timetable(if known)

1 2hr (double lecture)slot each week exceptWeek 1

Problem Classes: 12hr slot each weekon a later day thanthe lectures, in anappropriate learningenvironment

21. Pre-requisites before taking this module (other modules and/or general educational/academic requirements):

Physics A Level (or equivalent)

22. Modules for which this module is a pre-requisite:

None

23. Co-requisite modules:

None

24. Linked Modules:

25. Programme(s) (including Year of Study) to which this module is available on a mandatory basis:

26. Programme(s) (including Year of Study) to which this module is available on a required basis:

F344 (1) F656 (1) F300 (1) F303 (1) F352 (1) F350 (1) F3F5 (1) F521 (1) F390 (1) FGH1 (1) FG31 (1)

27. Programme(s) (including Year of Study) to which this module is available on an optional basis:

MODULE DESCRIPTION

28. Aims

To introduce the fundamental concepts and principles of wave phenomena.To highlight the many diverse areas of physics in which an understanding of waves is crucial.To introduce the concepts of interference and diffraction.

29. Learning Outcomes

At the end of the module the student should be able to:

Demonstrate an understanding of oscillators.Understand the fundamental principles underlying wave phenomena.Apply those principles to diverse phenomena.Understand wave reflection and transmission, superposition of waves.Solve problems on the behaviour of electromagnetic waves in vacuo and in dielectric materials.Understand linear and circular polarisation.Understand inteference and diffraction effects.Understand lenses and optical instruments.Apply Fourier techniques and understand their link to diffraction patterns.Understand the basic principles of lasers.

30. Teaching and Learning Strategies

The course will consist of a combination of lectures and problems classes. The lectures are designed to presentstudents with the main concepts of wave phenomena and illustrate these with examples, as well as showing howmathematical descriptions of such systems can be developed.

The problems classes give the students the opportunity to investigate further the concepts discussed in thelectures in an environment in which group work is encouraged and expert supervision is available.

31. Syllabus

Lec 1&2 Wk 1 1. Oscillators

Simple Harmonic Motion, Forced Oscillators, Damped Oscillators, Coupled Oscillators.

PC 1 Wk 1 Worked examples of SHM and oscillations. Related problems to be solved.

Lec 3&4 Wk 2 2. Fundamentals

Wave Equation, Phase velocity, wavenumber, wavelength, frequency. Superposition(same wavelength), Reflection and Transmission at Boundaries, Standing Waves,Amplitude, Intensity, Energy.

PC 2 Wk 2 Reinforcement of concepts from this weeks lectures. Examples. Problems related to thisweeks lectures.

Lec 5&6 Wk 3 3. Examples of Waves

Longitudinal and Transverse Waves. Waves on strings. Sound Waves, Light waves.Waves in elastic media. The Doppler Effect. Impedance. Waves in Cables.

PC 3 Wk 3 Worked examples from this weeks lectures. Problems related to this weeks lecturematerial.

Lec 7&8 Wk 4 4. Superposition of Waves (different wavelengths)

Page 9: ,'.'' ,'0''sdb/ModSpecs/2012/PHYSmod...Lec 15&16 Wk 9 Damped and Forced Harmonic Oscillator Resonance PC 8 Wk 9 Demonstration Experiment, Prediction and Writeup Lec 17&18 Wk 10 Gravitation

Beats, wavepackets, Group Velocity, Bandwidth Theorem.

PC 4 Wk 4 Illustrative examples from this week's lectures. Problems related to this week's material.

Lec 9&10 Wk 5 5. Electromagnetic Waves

EM waves in free space. EM waves in dielectrics. Linear and Circular Polarisation.Quarter and Half waveplates.

PC 5 Wk 5 Additional material for EM waves and polarisation. Problems related thereto.

Lec 11&12 Wk 6 Continuation of electromagnetic waves

Reflection of EM waves. Brewster Angle.

6. Interference Effects

Youngs slits. Thin film interference. Optical coatings. Filters.

PC 6 Wk 6 Reinforcement of reflection of EM waves.

Students carry out assignment related to Brewster Angle.

Lec 13&14 Wk 7 7. Diffraction

Fraunhofer Diffraction. Single slit diffraction. Effect of single slit diffraction on double slitpattern. Multiple slit diffraction.

PC 7 Wk 7 Reinforcement of single slit diffraction pattern. Students calculate diffraction patternarising from a double slit experiment.

Lec 15&16 Wk 8 Continuation of Diffraction

Diffraction at a circular aperture. Rayleigh criterion. Diffraction gratings. Phased Arrays.Interferometry.

PC 8 Wk 8 Background material for Rayleigh Criterion and illustrative applications. Problems relatedto this week's lectures.

Lec 17&18 Wk 9 8. Optical Cavities

Reflection, Refraction, Mirrors, Thin Lenses, Optical Instruments.

PC 9 Wk 9 Reinforcement of this week's lectures. Students do related problems.

Lec 19&20 Wk 10 9. Fourier Methods

Fourier analysis, Fourier series. Examples.

PC 10 Wk 10 Worked examples of the use of Fourier series. Students attack related problems.

Lec 21&22 Wk 11 Continuation of Fourier Methods

Fourier Transforms. Link of FTs to diffraction patterns.

PC 11 Wk 11 Further reinforcement material related to Fourier Transforms. Students attempt relatedproblems.

Lec 23&24 Wk 12 10. Lasers

Principles and Applications.

PC 12 Wk 12 Students research uses of lasers.

32. Recommended Texts

"University Physics" by Young and Freedman, published by Pearson Addison-Wesley

Access Code for Mastering Physics required

ASSESSMENT

33. EXAM Duration Timing(Semester)

% of finalmark

Resit/resubmissionopportunity

Penalty for latesubmission

Notes

Written examination 3 hours 2 60 August34. CONTINUOUS Duration Timing

(Semester)% of finalmark

Resit/resubmissionopportunity

Penalty for latesubmission

Notes

Problems set inworkshops

5 x 2hours

2 30 Subsumed by resitexamination

As universitypolicy

This work is notmarked anonymously

Mastering Physicshomework

10 x 2hours

2 10 Summer Vacation As universitypolicy

Page 10: ,'.'' ,'0''sdb/ModSpecs/2012/PHYSmod...Lec 15&16 Wk 9 Damped and Forced Harmonic Oscillator Resonance PC 8 Wk 9 Demonstration Experiment, Prediction and Writeup Lec 17&18 Wk 10 Gravitation

MODULE SPECIFICATION

The information contained in this module specification was correct at the time of publication but may be subject tochange, either during the session because of unforeseen circumstances, or following review of the module at the end ofthe session. Queries about the module should be directed to the member of staff with responsibility for the module.

1. Module Title FOUNDATIONS OF MODERN PHYSICS

2. Module Code PHYS104

3. Year 201213

4. OriginatingDepartment

Physics

5. Faculty Fac of Science & Engineering

6. Semester Second Semester

7. Credit Level Level One

8. Credit Value 15

9. External Examiner Physics External Examiner

10. Member of staff withresponsibility for themodule

Dr U Klein Physics [email protected]

11. Module Moderator Prof JB Dainton Physics [email protected]

12. Other ContributingDepartments

13. Other Staff Teachingon this Module

Dr HL Vaughan Central Teaching Laboratory [email protected]

14. Board of Studies Physics

15. Mode of Delivery Lectures/Classes

16. Location Main Liverpool City Campus

Lectures Seminars Tutorials Lab/Practicals Fieldwork/Placement Other TOTAL

17. ContactHours

24= 12 x 2lectures/week

20= 10 x 2-hourworkshops/ProblemClasses/MasteringPhysics

44

18. Non-contact hours 10619. TOTAL HOURS 150

Lectures Seminars Tutorials Lab/Practicals Fieldwork/Placement Other

20. Timetable(if known)

1 2hr (doublelecture) slot eachweek

Problem Classes: 1 2hrslot each week startingafter lecture 4, in anappropriate learningenvironment

21. Pre-requisites before taking this module (other modules and/or general educational/academic requirements):

Physics A Level (or equivalent)

22. Modules for which this module is a pre-requisite:

None

23. Co-requisite modules:

None

24.

24.Linked Modules:

25. Programme(s) (including Year of Study) to which this module is available on a mandatory basis:

26. Programme(s) (including Year of Study) to which this module is available on a required basis:

F300 (1) F303 (1) F352 (1) F350 (1) F3F5 (1) F521 (1) F390 (1) F656 (1) F344 (1) FG31 (1) FGH1 (1)

27. Programme(s) (including Year of Study) to which this module is available on an optional basis:

MODULE DESCRIPTION

28. Aims

To introduce the theory of special relativity and its experimental proofs.To carry out calculations using relativity and visualise them.To introduce the concepts and the experimental foundations of quantum theory.To carry out simple calculations related to quantum mechanical problem tasks.To show the impact of relativity and quantum theory on contemporary science and society.

29. Learning Outcomes

At the end of the module the student should be able to demonstrate:

An understanding why classical mechanics must have failed to describe the properties of light, the motionof objects with speeds close to the speed of light and the properties of microspopic systems.A basic knowledge on the experimental and theoretical concepts which founded modern physics, i.e. thateither relativity or quantum theory or both are needed to explain certain phenomena.A knowledge of the postulates of special relativity.An understanding of the concept of spacetime, of the relativity of length, time and velocity.An ability to apply the Lorentz transformation and the concept of Lorentz invariance to simple cases.An ability to apply the equations of relativistic energy, momentum and rest mass.An understanding of the Doppler effect for light and visualisation of relativistic effects.An ability to solve problems based on special relativity.An understanding why quantum theory is the conceptual framework to understand the microscopicproperties of the universe.An understanding of the quantum theory of light and the ability to apply the energy-momentumconservation for light, e.g. photo-electric effect, Compton effect.An understanding of the structure of atoms and its experimental foundations.An understanding of Bohr's theory of the atom and its application to the H-atom including the concept ofprincipal quantum numbers.An understanding of de Broglie waves and their statistical interpretation.An ability to explain the experimental evidence of de Broglie waves with scattering experiments ofelectrons, X-rays and neutrons.An understanding of the principles of quantum mechanical measurements and Heisenberg's uncertaintyprinciple.An understanding of the identity principle of microscopic particles and the basic idea of quantum (Fermi-Dirac and Bose-Einstein) statistics.A basic knowledge of contemporary applications of quantum theory and relativity, e.g. nuclear reactor andnuclear fissions, and the impact on our society.

30. Teaching and Learning Strategies

The course will consist of a combination of lectures and problems classes.

The lectures are designed to show students the foundations of modern physics and why and how classicalmechanics had to be extended. The new theoretical concepts will be developed step by step and if possible, theformulas will be derived. References to historical and contemporay experiments will be given extensively.

The problems classes give the students the opportunity to investigate further the concepts discussed in thelectures in an environment in which group work is encouraged and expert supervision is available. Theassessment is individual and may contain elements of peer marking. The intellectual focus is on problem solvingstrategies for relativistic and simple quantum mechanical problems, and application of physical insights to newproblems. Students are also expected to complete problems as exercises on an individual basis using MasteringPhysics online Problems; these are marked and feedback is provided through Mastering Physics. The intellectual

Page 11: ,'.'' ,'0''sdb/ModSpecs/2012/PHYSmod...Lec 15&16 Wk 9 Damped and Forced Harmonic Oscillator Resonance PC 8 Wk 9 Demonstration Experiment, Prediction and Writeup Lec 17&18 Wk 10 Gravitation

focus will be on exercising known material.

31. Syllabus

Lec 1&2 Wk 1 Introduction and historical context : The world according to a 19th centuryphysicist.The theoretical concepts based on the two known fundamental forces at the pre-modern era, gravitational and electromagentic forces, and their consequences onthe thinking in physics and society.The key experiments and 19th century discoveries (e.g. discovery of atomicspectrum of hydrogen, sparks in gases, cathode rays, X-rays, radioactivity, theelectron, and the constancy of speed of light,) and the resulting conflicts and thetrials to explain them.

Lec 3&4 Wk 2 Einstein's solution of the conflict between motion (classical mechanics) andconstancy of speed of light, the postulates of special relativity.Frames of reference.The concept of a thought experiment.Relativity of simultaneity.The light clock, Lorentz and speed factors, relativity of time and synchronisationof clocks.Relativity of length.

PC 1 Wk 3 Concepts of problem solving strategies.Examples and excercises for time dilation, length contraction and simultaneityillustrated with links to classical mechanics.

Lec 5&6 Wk 3 Galilean transformation equations.Derivation of Lorentz (Einstein) transformation equations.Time dilation and length contraction using Lorentz transformations.The Twin paradox.Doppler effect for light.

PC 2 Wk 4 Practise tasks using Lorentz transformations.Practise tasks for the Doppler effect of light.Sketch the Twin paradox and its interpretation.

Lec 7&8 Wk 4 Relativity of velocities. Velocity addition.Transformations between 3 frames of reference.Spacetime interval and the concept of Lorentz invariance.Basic concepts of world line, light cone and causality.

PC 3 Wk 5 Practise tasks for velocity addition.Practise calculations using spacetime interval.

Lec 9&10 Wk 5 A new type of energy (E=mc2).A new look at energy and momentum.Relations of relativistic energy and momentum, units.Energy-mass conservation and applications.

PC 4 Wk 6 Practise calculations using energy-momentum formulas.Practise calculations of relativistic collisions.Particle creations.

Lec 11&12 Wk 6 Photons and the need of a quantum theory of light.Black body radiation.Planck's quantum.Einstein's completion of Planck's quantum.Experimental evidence for energy-momentum conservation for light : Photo-electric effect, Compton effect.

PC 5 Wk 7 Sketch experiemental set-ups of photo-electric effect.Practise the derivation of the theoretical explanation of the Compton effect.

Lec 13&14 Wk 7 Atoms : brief history.Atomic spectra.Thompson's pudding.Rutherford and the nucleus.Franck-Hertz experiment.Stern-Gerlach experiement.

PC 6 Wk 8 Sketch the experimental set-ups of Rutherford, Franck-Hertz and Stern-Gerlachexperiments and their interpretation.

Lec 15&16 Wk 8 Bohr's theory of the atom : successes and short comings.Hydrogen spectrum, Rydberg constant and principal quantum numbers.The concept of the Laser.

PC 7 Wk 9 Sketch the idea of Bohr's theory of the atom.Practise simple calculations of H-spectrum series.Sketch the Laser principle.

Lec 17&18 Wk 9 De Broglie waves and group velocity.Experimental evidence of de Broglie waves : scattering experiements ofelectrons, of X-rays, and of neutrons.Bohr's principle of complementarity.Statistical interpretation of de Broglie waves (and sneak preview to Schroedingerequations).

PC 8 Wk 10 Explain de Broglie waves and why they need a statistical interpretation.Sketch the experimental set-up of at least one experiement which proofs theconcept of de Broglie waves.

Lec 19&20 Wk 10 Quantum mechanical measurements and the Feynman perspective.Heisenberg's uncertainty principle.Identity principle of microscopic particles.Basic concepts of quantum statistics: Fermi-Dirac and Bose-Einstein statistics.The discovery of anti-matter.The discovery of Bose-Einstein Condensates.

PC 9 Wk 11 Sketch and explain the Feynman perspective.Sketch and explain the implications of a quantum mechanical measurement andthe Heisenberg's uncertainty principle.Explain the basic idea behind quantum statistics.

Lec 21&22 Wk 11 Complex atoms and nuclei.Periodic system of elements.Nuclear decay, nuclear reactors, nuclear fission.Selected contemporary applications of quantum and relativistic effects.Outlook: Particle physics, astrophysics, cosmology and the need of a new theory.

PC 10 Wk 12 Practise exam-style questions.

Lec 23&24 Wk 12 Summarising thoughts.Revision relativity.Revision quantum theory.

32. Recommended Texts

"University Physics" by Young and Freedman, published by Pearson Addison-Wesley (mainly Chapters 37, 38,39, part of 40)

Access Code for Mastering Physics required

Additional, selected literature recommendations (see also more in reading list of University's library):

Page 12: ,'.'' ,'0''sdb/ModSpecs/2012/PHYSmod...Lec 15&16 Wk 9 Damped and Forced Harmonic Oscillator Resonance PC 8 Wk 9 Demonstration Experiment, Prediction and Writeup Lec 17&18 Wk 10 Gravitation

"Dynamics and Relativity" by J.R. Forshaw and A.G. Smith"Principles of Quantum Mechanics" by D.J. Blochinzev"QED the strange theory of light and matter" by R.F. Feynman"The elegant Universe" by B. Greene

ASSESSMENT

33. EXAM Duration Timing(Semester)

% of finalmark

Resit/resubmissionopportunity

Penalty for latesubmission

Notes

Written examination 3 hours 2 60 August34. CONTINUOUS Duration Timing

(Semester)% of finalmark

Resit/resubmissionopportunity

Penalty for latesubmission

Notes

Problems set inworkshops

10 x 2hours

2 30 Subsumed by resitexamination

As universitypolicy

This work is partiallynot markedanonymously

Mastering Physicshomeworks

2 10 Summer vacation As universitypolicy

MODULE SPECIFICATION

The information contained in this module specification was correct at the time of publication but may be subject tochange, either during the session because of unforeseen circumstances, or following review of the module at the end ofthe session. Queries about the module should be directed to the member of staff with responsibility for the module.

1. Module Title WORKING WITH PHYSICS I

2. Module Code PHYS105

3. Year 201213

4. OriginatingDepartment

Physics

5. Faculty Fac of Science & Engineering

6. Semester Whole Session

7. Credit Level Level One

8. Credit Value 15

9. External Examiner Physics External Examiner

10. Member of staff withresponsibility for themodule

Dr L Moran Physics [email protected]

11. Module Moderator Dr U Klein Physics [email protected]

12. Other ContributingDepartments

13. Other Staff Teachingon this Module

Dr C Simpson Physics [email protected] HL Vaughan Central Teaching Laboratory [email protected]

14. Board of Studies Physics

15. Mode of Delivery Lectures/Classes

16. Location Main Liverpool City Campus

Lectures Seminars Tutorials Lab/Practicals Fieldwork/Placement Other TOTAL

17. ContactHours

27= 10 x 1/2lectures/weeksem 1 + 6 x 2lectures/weeksem 2

32= 10 x 2-hourworkshops sem 150% of marks + 6 x2-hour workshopssem 2 15% of marks

59

18. Non-contact hours 9119. TOTAL HOURS 150

Lectures Seminars Tutorials Lab/Practicals Fieldwork/Placement Other

20. Timetable(if known)

21. Pre-requisites before taking this module (other modules and/or general educational/academic requirements):

Physics A Level (or equivalent) A student cannot register for both PHYS105 and PHYS134

22. Modules for which this module is a pre-requisite:

23. Co-requisite modules:

None

24. Linked Modules:

Page 13: ,'.'' ,'0''sdb/ModSpecs/2012/PHYSmod...Lec 15&16 Wk 9 Damped and Forced Harmonic Oscillator Resonance PC 8 Wk 9 Demonstration Experiment, Prediction and Writeup Lec 17&18 Wk 10 Gravitation

25. Programme(s) (including Year of Study) to which this module is available on a mandatory basis:

26. Programme(s) (including Year of Study) to which this module is available on a required basis:

F3F5 (1) F521 (1)

27. Programme(s) (including Year of Study) to which this module is available on an optional basis:

F300 (1) F303 (1) F352 (1)

MODULE DESCRIPTION

28. Aims

To develop skills with spreadsheetsTo develop skills in using computers to perform mathematical calculationsTo illustrate the insight into physics which can be obtained by exploiting computational software packagesTo improve science students' skills in communicating scientific information in appropriate written and oralformatsTo provide students with a broad introduction to astronomyTo describe how telescopes and detectors are used to make observationsTo explain how observations support our understanding of stars, galaxies, and the Universe as a wholeTo introduce students to the methods by which astronomers measure the brightness and distance ofastronomical objects

29. Learning Outcomes

At the end of the module the student should have:

An ability to use spreadsheets and mathematical packages to calculate and graph mathematicalequationsAn ability to apply mathematical software packages to physics problemsAn appreciation of how to present results by computerThe ability to communicate more confidentlyAn understanding of some of the key factors in successful communicationA basic knowledge of the structure and constituents of the Universe ranging in scale from the SolarSystem to clusters of galaxiesThe ability to outline the methods which astronomers employ to gather and analyse dataAn understanding of the techniques of measurement of brightness and distance of astronomical objectsKnowledge of the current cosmological model and the evidence supporting it

30. Teaching and Learning Strategies

Students will attend 15 lectures and 10 x 2 hour training sessions on applications of PCs and workshops oncommunication skills in Physics in semester 1.

Students will attend 12 lectures and 6 x 2 hour problem classes in semester 2.

Private study time is provided for completion of assignments.

31. Syllabus

Spreadsheet exercises based on physics examples and on error evaluation.Plotting functions, complex numbers, animations, integration and differentiation.Important elements of good communication in oral presentations, written reports(including laboratory reports).Basic concepts: The Earth in space, the Solar SystemInstrumentation: Telescopes, Reflectors versus refractors, types of mount, foci,image scale, ground versus spaceDetectors: Photometers, photography, CCD, introduction to imaging andspectroscopyMeasurement of brightness and distance: Magnitude system, Hertzprung-Russelldiagram, evolution of stars, types of galaxy, distance ladder.Issues in Contemporary Astronomy: the Big Bang and the fate of the Universe;protostars; black holes; the missing mass problem; the search for extra solarplanets; gamma-ray bursters.

32. Recommended Texts

"Universe" by Freedman and Kaufman (Freeman)

ASSESSMENT

33. EXAM Duration Timing(Semester)

% of finalmark

Resit/resubmissionopportunity

Penalty for latesubmission

Notes

Written examination 90 minutes 2 35 August34. CONTINUOUS Duration Timing

(Semester)% of finalmark

Resit/resubmissionopportunity

Penalty for latesubmission

Notes

Problems set inworkshops

16 x 2hours

1+2 65 None: Exemptionapproved31/8/2011

As universitypolicy

This work is notmarkedanonymously. Sem 1:10 x 2 hr: 50%. Sem2: 6 x 2 hr: 15%.

Page 14: ,'.'' ,'0''sdb/ModSpecs/2012/PHYSmod...Lec 15&16 Wk 9 Damped and Forced Harmonic Oscillator Resonance PC 8 Wk 9 Demonstration Experiment, Prediction and Writeup Lec 17&18 Wk 10 Gravitation

MODULE SPECIFICATION

The information contained in this module specification was correct at the time of publication but may be subject tochange, either during the session because of unforeseen circumstances, or following review of the module at the end ofthe session. Queries about the module should be directed to the member of staff with responsibility for the module.

1. Module Title PRACTICAL PHYSICS I

2. Module Code PHYS106

3. Year 201213

4. OriginatingDepartment

Physics

5. Faculty Fac of Science & Engineering

6. Semester Whole Session

7. Credit Level Level One

8. Credit Value 15

9. External Examiner Physics External Examiner

10. Member of staff withresponsibility for themodule

Dr NK McCauley Physics [email protected]

11. Module Moderator Dr DS Martin Physics [email protected]

12. Other ContributingDepartments

13. Other Staff Teachingon this Module

Dr DT Joss Physics [email protected] KM Hock Physics [email protected] JH Vossebeld Physics [email protected] HL Vaughan Central Teaching Laboratory [email protected]

14. Board of Studies Physics

15. Mode of Delivery Laboratory/Practical

16. Location Main Liverpool City Campus

Lectures Seminars Tutorials Lab/Practicals Fieldwork/Placement Other TOTAL

17. ContactHours

132 132

18. Non-contact hours 1819. TOTAL HOURS 150

Lectures Seminars Tutorials Lab/Practicals Fieldwork/Placement Other

20. Timetable(if known)

21. Pre-requisites before taking this module (other modules and/or general educational/academic requirements):

Physics A-Level or equivalent

22. Modules for which this module is a pre-requisite:

PHYS259

23. Co-requisite modules:

24. Linked Modules:

25. Programme(s) (including Year of Study) to which this module is available on a mandatory basis:

26. Programme(s) (including Year of Study) to which this module is available on a required basis:

F303 (1) F352 (1) F3F5 (1) F300 (1) F521 (1) F350 (1) F390 (1)

27. Programme(s) (including Year of Study) to which this module is available on an optional basis:

MODULE DESCRIPTION

28. Aims

To provide a core of essential introductory laboratory methods which overlap and develop from A-LevelTo introduce the basis of experimental techniques in physical measurement, the use of computertechniques in analysis, and to provide experience in doing experiments, keeping records and writingreports.To compliment the core physics program with experimental examples of material taught in the lecturecourses.

29. Learning Outcomes

At the end of the module the student should have:

Experienced the practical nature of physics.Developed an awareness of the importance of accurate experimentation, particularly observation, recordkeeping.Developed the ability to plan, execute and report on the results of an investigation using appropriateanalysis of the data and associated uncertaintiesDeveloped the practical and technical skill required for physics experimentation and an appreciation of theimportance of a systematic approach to experimental measurement.Developed problem solving skills of a practical natureDeveloped analytical skills in the analysis of the dataDeveloped communication skills in the presentation of the investigation in a clear and logical mannerDeveloped investgative skills in performing the experiment and extracting information from varioussources with which to compare the resultsDeveloped the ability to organise their time and meet deadlinesUnderstand the interaction between theory and experiment, in particular the ties to the material presentedin the lecture courses.

30. Teaching and Learning Strategies

The module is split into 3 parts

1. Introduction to measuring instruments and data analysis

Three sessions are spent introudcing the basic concepts of the laboratory class and introducing basic laboratoryskills and ideas.

2. Foundation Experiments

Eight experiments are spent learning about different experimental techniques and instrumentation.

3. Core Experiments

Eleven experiments are spent investigating core physics concepts that are covered in the lectures from the firstand second year of the core physics program.

31. Syllabus

Introductory Experiments

Introduction to Measurement by mesurement of thermal expansion.Introduction to Experimental Errors with a simple pendulum and a gieger counter.Erorr Analysis via selected exercizes

Foundation experiments.

Kirchov's LawsCapacitors and Inductors

Page 15: ,'.'' ,'0''sdb/ModSpecs/2012/PHYSmod...Lec 15&16 Wk 9 Damped and Forced Harmonic Oscillator Resonance PC 8 Wk 9 Demonstration Experiment, Prediction and Writeup Lec 17&18 Wk 10 Gravitation

LCR CircuitsRectificationStefans Law and the Properties of a ThermistorHookes LawGeometrical OpticsLiquid Nitrogen Experiment

Core experiments

Rutherford ScatteringAttenuation of Gamma Rays in Different MaterialsPrinciples of ElectronicsMilikans ExperimentDiffraction of LightSpeed of SoundProperties of the ElectronCapacitance and ElectrostaticsElectromagnetic InductionThe Ideal Gas EquationDiffraction and Interference of Microwaves

32. Recommended Texts

Young and Friedman: University Physics

A Laboratory Manual is Provided

ASSESSMENT

33. EXAM Duration Timing(Semester)

% of finalmark

Resit/resubmissionopportunity

Penalty for latesubmission

Notes

34. CONTINUOUS Duration Timing

(Semester)% of finalmark

Resit/resubmissionopportunity

Penalty for latesubmission

Notes

Three IntroductoryExperiments

18 hours 1 8 None: Exemptionapproved31/8/2011

As universitypolicy

Anonymous markingnot possible

Eight FoundationExperiments

48 hours 1 32 None: Exemptionapproved31/8/2011

As universitypolicy

This work is notmarked anonymously

Eleven CoreExperimetns

66 hours 2 60 None: Exemptionapproved31/8/2011

As universitypolicy

This work is notmarked anonymously

MODULE SPECIFICATION

The information contained in this module specification was correct at the time of publication but may be subject tochange, either during the session because of unforeseen circumstances, or following review of the module at the end ofthe session. Queries about the module should be directed to the member of staff with responsibility for the module.

1. Module Title MATHEMATICS FOR PHYSICISTS I

2. Module Code PHYS107

3. Year 201213

4. OriginatingDepartment

Physics

5. Faculty Fac of Science & Engineering

6. Semester First Semester

7. Credit Level Level One

8. Credit Value 15

9. External Examiner Physics External Examiner

10. Member of staff withresponsibility for themodule

Dr DT Joss Physics [email protected]

11. Module Moderator Prof TJ Greenshaw Physics [email protected]

12. Other ContributingDepartments

Mathematical Sciences

13. Other Staff Teachingon this Module

Prof R Herzberg Physics [email protected] AE Faraggi Mathematical Sciences [email protected] HL Vaughan Central Teaching Laboratory [email protected]

14. Board of Studies Physics

15. Mode of Delivery Lectures/Classes

16. Location Main Liverpool City Campus

Lectures Seminars Tutorials Lab/Practicals Fieldwork/Placement Other TOTAL

17. ContactHours

33= 11 x 3lectures/week

22= 11 x 2-hourworkshops

55

18. Non-contact hours 9519. TOTAL HOURS 150

Lectures Seminars Tutorials Lab/Practicals Fieldwork/Placement Other

20. Timetable(if known)

1 2hr (double lecture)slot each week exceptWeek 1

Problem Classes: 12hr slot each weekon a later day thanthe lectures, in anappropriate learningenvironment

21. Pre-requisites before taking this module (other modules and/or general educational/academic requirements):

Physics A Level (or equivalent)

22. Modules for which this module is a pre-requisite:

None

23. Co-requisite modules:

None

Page 16: ,'.'' ,'0''sdb/ModSpecs/2012/PHYSmod...Lec 15&16 Wk 9 Damped and Forced Harmonic Oscillator Resonance PC 8 Wk 9 Demonstration Experiment, Prediction and Writeup Lec 17&18 Wk 10 Gravitation

24. Linked Modules:

25. Programme(s) (including Year of Study) to which this module is available on a mandatory basis:

26. Programme(s) (including Year of Study) to which this module is available on a required basis:

F300 (1) F303 (1) F352 (1) F350 (1) F3F5 (1) F521 (1) F3F7 (1) F390 (1) F660 (1) F656 (1) F640 (1) F641(1)

27. Programme(s) (including Year of Study) to which this module is available on an optional basis:

MODULE DESCRIPTION

28. Aims

To provide a foundation for the mathematics required by physical scientists.

To assist students in acquiring the skills necessary to use the mathematics developed in the module.

29. Learning Outcomes

At the end of the module the student should be able to demonstrate:

a good working knowledge of differential and integral calculusfamiliarity with some of the elementary functions common in applied mathematics and sciencean introductory knowledge of functions of several variablesmanipulation of complex numbers and use them to solve simple problems involving fractional powersan introductory knowledge of seriesa good rudimentary knowledge of simple problems involving statistics: binomial and Poisson distributions,mean, standard deviation, standard error of meanhave an introductory knowledge of vector algebra

30. Teaching and Learning Strategies

The course will consist of a combination of lectures and problems classes. The lectures are designed to presentstudents withthe main concepts of mathematics and illustrate these with reference to physics applications.

The problems classes give the students the opportunity to investigate further the concepts discussed in thelectures in an environment in which group work is encouraged and expert supervision is available. Theintellectual focus is on transfer of knowledge to new situations and application of physical insights to newproblems.

Students are also expected to complete further problems as exercises on an individual basis using MyMathLabonline Problems; these are marked and feedback is provided through MyMathLab. The intellectual focus will beon exercising known material.

31. Syllabus

Lec 1&2 Wk 2 FundamentalsIntroduction to statistics. Binomial and Poisson distributions, mean, standarddeviation, standard error on mean, chi-squared, application to experimentalanalysis.

PC 1 Wk 2 Problem set 1 - Statistics.

Lec 3&4 Wk 3 VectorsScalar and vector products.Simple vector equations.Applications of vectors to solving physics problems.

PC 2 Wk 3 Problem set 2 - Vectors.

Lec 5&6 Wk 4 Differentiation IBasics of differentiation

The product rule.

PC 3 Wk 4 Problem set 3 - Differentiation I.

Lec 7&8 Wk 5 Differentiation IIThe chain rule.Application of differentiation to solving physical problems.

PC 4 Wk 5 Problem set 4 - Differentiation II.

Lec 9&10 Wk 6 Partial Differentiation.Applications of partial differentiation to finding solutions to physics problems.

PC 5 Wk 6 Problem set 5 - Partial differentiation.

Lec 11&12 Wk 7 Integration I.Basics of integration.Integration of the function of a function.Definite integrals.Volumes of rotation.

PC 6 Wk 7 Problem set 6 - Integration I.

Lec 13&14 Wk 8 Integration II.Integration by substitution.Trigonometric integration.Integration by parts.Integration by partial fractions.

PC 7 Wk 8 Problem set 7 - Integration II

Lec 15&16 Wk 9 Integration III.Multi-dimensional integration.

PC 8 Wk 9 Problem set 8 - Integration III

Lec 17&18 Wk 10 Introduction to Series.Arithmetic Series.Geometric Series.Taylor and Maclaurin Series.

PC 9 Wk 10 Problem set 9 - Series.

Lec 19&20 Wk 11 Polar coordinate systems.Spherical polar coordinates.Cylindrical polar coordinates.Using polar coordinates to find simple solutions to physical problems.

PC 10 Wk 11 Problem set 10 - Polar coordinate systems.

Lec 21&22 Wk 12 Complex Numbers

PC 11 Wk 12 Problem set 11 - Complex Numbers

32. Recommended Texts

"Calculus: a complete course." by Adam and Essex, published by Pearson Addison-Wesley

Access Code for MyMathLab.com/global required.

Page 17: ,'.'' ,'0''sdb/ModSpecs/2012/PHYSmod...Lec 15&16 Wk 9 Damped and Forced Harmonic Oscillator Resonance PC 8 Wk 9 Demonstration Experiment, Prediction and Writeup Lec 17&18 Wk 10 Gravitation

Access Code for MyMathLab.com/global required.

"Engineering Mathematics" by K.A. Stroud.

ASSESSMENT

33. EXAM Duration Timing(Semester)

% of finalmark

Resit/resubmissionopportunity

Penalty for latesubmission

Notes

Written examination 3 hours 1 70 August34. CONTINUOUS Duration Timing

(Semester)% of finalmark

Resit/resubmissionopportunity

Penalty for latesubmission

Notes

Problems set inworkshops

10 x 2hours

1 20 Subsumed by resitexamination

As universitypolicy

This work is notmarked anonymously

Mastering Physicshomework

5 x 2hours

1 10 Summer Vacation As universitypolicy

MODULE SPECIFICATION

The information contained in this module specification was correct at the time of publication but may be subject tochange, either during the session because of unforeseen circumstances, or following review of the module at the end ofthe session. Queries about the module should be directed to the member of staff with responsibility for the module.

1. Module Title MATHEMATICS FOR PHYSICISTS II

2. Module Code PHYS108

3. Year 201213

4. OriginatingDepartment

Physics

5. Faculty Fac of Science & Engineering

6. Semester Second Semester

7. Credit Level Level One

8. Credit Value 15

9. External Examiner Physics External Examiner

10. Member of staff withresponsibility for themodule

Prof TJ Greenshaw Physics [email protected]

11. Module Moderator Dr J Kretzschmar Physics [email protected]

12. Other ContributingDepartments

Mathematical Sciences

13. Other Staff Teachingon this Module

Dr HL Vaughan Central Teaching Laboratory [email protected]

14. Board of Studies Physics

15. Mode of Delivery Lectures/Classes

16. Location Main Liverpool City Campus

Lectures Seminars Tutorials Lab/Practicals Fieldwork/Placement Other TOTAL

17. ContactHours

36= 12 x 3lectures/week

24= 12 x 2-hourworkshops

60

18. Non-contact hours 9019. TOTAL HOURS 150

Lectures Seminars Tutorials Lab/Practicals Fieldwork/Placement Other

20. Timetable(if known)

One 2 hour (doublelecture) slot each week

One 2 hour ProblemsClass each week

21. Pre-requisites before taking this module (other modules and/or general educational/academic requirements):

Physics A Level (or equivalent)

22. Modules for which this module is a pre-requisite:

None

23. Co-requisite modules:

None

24. Linked Modules:

25. Programme(s) (including Year of Study) to which this module is available on a mandatory basis:

Page 18: ,'.'' ,'0''sdb/ModSpecs/2012/PHYSmod...Lec 15&16 Wk 9 Damped and Forced Harmonic Oscillator Resonance PC 8 Wk 9 Demonstration Experiment, Prediction and Writeup Lec 17&18 Wk 10 Gravitation

26. Programme(s) (including Year of Study) to which this module is available on a required basis:

F300 (1) F303 (1) F352 (1) F350 (1) F3F5 (1) F521 (1) F3F7 (1) F390 (1) F640 (1) F641 (1) F656 (1) F660(1)

27. Programme(s) (including Year of Study) to which this module is available on an optional basis:

MODULE DESCRIPTION

28. Aims

To consolidate and extend the understanding of mathematics required for the physical sciences.To develop student’s ability to apply the mathematical techniques developed in the module to theunderstanding of physical problems.

29. Learning Outcomes

After successfully completing this module, students should:

Be able to manipulate matrices with confidence and use matrix methods to solve simultaneous linearequations.Be familiar with methods for solving first and second order differential equations in one variable.Have a basic knowledge of vector algebra.Have a basic understanding of Fourier series and transforms.

30. Teaching and Learning Strategies

The course will consist of a combination of lectures and problems classes.

Mathematical techniques will be introduced in the lectures, together with examples of their application in physicsand astrophysics. In the problems classes, students, working in small groups, will be required to use thesetechniques to solve a series of graduated questions and problems. The classes will be overseen by the lecturer,other staff and demonstrators, who will offer assistance as needed. The students work will be handed in andassessed at the end of the class.

31. Syllabus

Lectures Matrices- addition, multiplication, determinant, inverse, solution of systems oflinear equations.Differential equations – first and second order Diff. Eqn.s in one variable,separation of variables, integrating factors, homogenous (and inhomogeneous?)equations.Vector calculus – differentiation and integration of vectors, vector and scalarfields, Grad, Div, Curl and Laplace in Cartesian Co-ord.s.Mention Laplace’s and Poisson’s equations and different coordinate systems.Series solutions, Legendre polynomials, mention spherical harmonics andSchrödinger’s equation.Fourier series, periodic functions, even and odd expansions.Fourier integrals and transforms.

32. Recommended Texts

Adams

ASSESSMENT

33. EXAM Duration Timing(Semester)

% of finalmark

Resit/resubmissionopportunity

Penalty for latesubmission

Notes

Written examination 3 hours 2 70 August34. CONTINUOUS Duration Timing

(Semester)% of finalmark

Resit/resubmissionopportunity

Penalty for latesubmission

Notes

Problems set inworkshops

10 x 2hours

2 30 Subsumed by resitexamination

As universitypolicy

This work is notmarked anonymously

MODULE SPECIFICATION

The information contained in this module specification was correct at the time of publication but may be subject tochange, either during the session because of unforeseen circumstances, or following review of the module at the end ofthe session. Queries about the module should be directed to the member of staff with responsibility for the module.

1. Module Title WORKING WITH MEDICAL PHYSICS I

2. Module Code PHYS115

3. Year 201213

4. OriginatingDepartment

Physics

5. Faculty Fac of Science & Engineering

6. Semester Whole Session

7. Credit Level Level One

8. Credit Value 15

9. External Examiner Physics External Examiner

10. Member of staff withresponsibility for themodule

Dr L Moran Physics [email protected]

11. Module Moderator Dr U Klein Physics [email protected]

12. Other ContributingDepartments

13. Other Staff Teachingon this Module

Dr HL Vaughan Central Teaching Laboratory [email protected] HC Boston Physics [email protected]

14. Board of Studies Physics

15. Mode of Delivery Lectures/Classes

16. Location Main Liverpool City Campus

Lectures Seminars Tutorials Lab/Practicals Fieldwork/Placement Other TOTAL

17. ContactHours

27= 10 x 1/2lectures/weeksem 1 + 6 x 2lectures/weeksem 2

32= 10 x 2-hourworkshops sem 150% of marks + 6 x2-hour workshopssem 2 15% of marks

59

18. Non-contact hours 9119. TOTAL HOURS 150

Lectures Seminars Tutorials Lab/Practicals Fieldwork/Placement Other

20. Timetable(if known)

21. Pre-requisites before taking this module (other modules and/or general educational/academic requirements):

Physics A Level (or equivalent) A student cannot register for both PHYS115 and PHYS136

22. Modules for which this module is a pre-requisite:

23. Co-requisite modules:

None

24. Linked Modules:

Page 19: ,'.'' ,'0''sdb/ModSpecs/2012/PHYSmod...Lec 15&16 Wk 9 Damped and Forced Harmonic Oscillator Resonance PC 8 Wk 9 Demonstration Experiment, Prediction and Writeup Lec 17&18 Wk 10 Gravitation

25. Programme(s) (including Year of Study) to which this module is available on a mandatory basis:

26. Programme(s) (including Year of Study) to which this module is available on a required basis:

F350 (1)

27. Programme(s) (including Year of Study) to which this module is available on an optional basis:

F300 (1) F303 (1) F352 (1) F3F7 (1)

MODULE DESCRIPTION

28. Aims

To develop skills with spreadsheetsTo develop skills in using computers to perform mathematical calculationsTo illustrate the insight into physics which can be obtained by exploiting computational software packagesTo improve science students' skills in communicating scientific information in appropriate written and oralformatsTo provide the students with a broad introduction to medical physicsTo provide the students with the physics basis for measurement techniques used in medicine

29. Learning Outcomes

At the end of the module the student should have:

An ability to use spreadsheets and mathematical packages to calculate and graph mathematicalequationsAn ability to apply mathematical software packages to physics problemsAn appreciation of how to present results by computerThe ability to communicate more confidentlyAn understanding of some of the key factors in successful communicationA basic understanding of the underlying physics properties and ideas that are utilised in medical physicsA basic knowledge of the physics involved in measurement techniques used in medicineAn understanding of the techniques used in measurements in medical applicationsThe ability to solve simple problems in medical physics

30. Teaching and Learning Strategies

Students will attend 15 lectures and 10 x 2 hour training sessions on applications of PCs and workshops oncommunication skills in Physics in semester 1.

Students will attend 12 lectures and 6 x 2 hour problem classes in semester 2.

Private study time is provided for completion of assignments.

31. Syllabus

Spreadsheet exercises based on physics examples and on error evaluation.Plotting functions, complex numbers, animations, integration and differentiation.Important elements of good communication in oral presentations, written reports(including laboratory reports).

Physics of the Body

Forces: loading of muscular and skeletal systemsVision: basic optics of the eye, defects of vision and their correction.Hearing: the ear as a detection system, sensitivity, frequency response, thresholdof hearing, defects of hearing.Heart: the heart as an electromechanical pump, electrical signal generation,measurement of ECGs, defibrillation, blood pressure.

Measurement and Imaging

Electrical signals and their generation and detection. Simple ECG machines andwaveforms.Ultrasound imaging, generation and detection of ultrasound pulses (piezoelectricdevices), advantages and disadvantages.

Production of magnetic resonance imaging.Properties of laser radiation and applications.X-ray imaging, principles of production and detection, absorption and attenuationof X-rays. Imaging, contrast enhancement and photographic detection, diffractionenhanced imaging.Nuclear imaging, CT, PET and SPECT. The decay process, interaction withmatter, reconstruction of image.

32. Recommended Texts

There is no one recommended reference book. Suitable texts include;

1) "Physics in Nuclear Medicine" by Cherry, Sorenson and Phelps : ISBN 072168341X

2) "Nuclear Physics Principles and Applications" by Lilley : ISBN 0471979368

3) "University Physics" by Young and Freedman, published by Pearson Addison-Wesley

ASSESSMENT

33. EXAM Duration Timing(Semester)

% of finalmark

Resit/resubmissionopportunity

Penalty for latesubmission

Notes

Written examination 90 minutes 2 35 August34. CONTINUOUS Duration Timing

(Semester)% of finalmark

Resit/resubmissionopportunity

Penalty for latesubmission

Notes

Problems set inworkshops

16 x 2hours

1+2 65 None: Exemptionapproved31/8/2011

As universitypolicy

This work is notmarkedanonymously. Sem 1:10 x 2 hr: 50%. Sem2: 6 x 2 hr: 15%.

Page 20: ,'.'' ,'0''sdb/ModSpecs/2012/PHYSmod...Lec 15&16 Wk 9 Damped and Forced Harmonic Oscillator Resonance PC 8 Wk 9 Demonstration Experiment, Prediction and Writeup Lec 17&18 Wk 10 Gravitation

MODULE SPECIFICATION

The information contained in this module specification was correct at the time of publication but may be subject tochange, either during the session because of unforeseen circumstances, or following review of the module at the end ofthe session. Queries about the module should be directed to the member of staff with responsibility for the module.

1. Module Title WORKING WITH NUCLEAR SCIENCE I

2. Module Code PHYS135

3. Year 201213

4. OriginatingDepartment

Physics

5. Faculty Fac of Science & Engineering

6. Semester Whole Session

7. Credit Level Level One

8. Credit Value 15

9. External Examiner Physics External Examiner

10. Member of staff withresponsibility for themodule

Dr L Moran Physics [email protected]

11. Module Moderator Dr U Klein Physics [email protected]

12. Other ContributingDepartments

13. Other Staff Teachingon this Module

Dr HL Vaughan Central Teaching Laboratory [email protected] PJ Nolan Physics [email protected]

14. Board of Studies Physics

15. Mode of Delivery Lectures/Classes

16. Location Main Liverpool City Campus

Lectures Seminars Tutorials Lab/Practicals Fieldwork/Placement Other TOTAL

17. ContactHours

27= 10 x 1/2lectures/weeksem 1 + 6 x 2lectures/weeksem 2

32= 10 x 2-hourworkshops sem 150% of marks + 6 x2-hour workshopssem 2 15% of marks

59

18. Non-contact hours 9119. TOTAL HOURS 150

Lectures Seminars Tutorials Lab/Practicals Fieldwork/Placement Other

20. Timetable(if known)

21. Pre-requisites before taking this module (other modules and/or general educational/academic requirements):

Physics A Level (or equivalent) A student cannot register for both PHYS135 and PHYS138

22. Modules for which this module is a pre-requisite:

23. Co-requisite modules:

None

24. Linked Modules:

25. Programme(s) (including Year of Study) to which this module is available on a mandatory basis:

26. Programme(s) (including Year of Study) to which this module is available on a required basis:

F390 (1)

27. Programme(s) (including Year of Study) to which this module is available on an optional basis:

F300 (1) F303 (1) F352 (1) F3F7 (1)

MODULE DESCRIPTION

28. Aims

To develop skills with spreadsheetsTo develop skills in using computers to perform mathematical calculationsTo illustrate the insight into physics which can be obtained by exploiting computational software packagesTo improve science students' skills in communicating scientific information in appropriate written and oralformatsTo provide the students with a broad introduction to nuclear scienceTo provide the students with the physics basis for measurement techniques used in nuclear science

29. Learning Outcomes

At the end of the module the student should have:

An ability to use spreadsheets and mathematical packages to calculate and graph mathematicalequationsAn ability to apply mathematical software packages to physics problemsAn appreciation of how to present results by computerThe ability to communicate more confidentlyAn understanding of some of the key factors in successful communicationA basic understanding of the underlying physics properties and ideas that are utilised in nuclear scienceA basic knowledge of the physics involved in measurement techniques used in nuclear scienceAn understanding of the techniques used in measurements in nuclear applicationsThe ability to solve simple problems in nuclear science

30. Teaching and Learning Strategies

Students will attend 15 lectures and 10 x 2 hour training sessions on applications of PCs and workshops oncommunication skills in Physics in semester 1.

Students will attend 12 lectures and 6 x 2 hour problem classes in semester 2.

Private study time is provided for completion of assignments.

31. Syllabus

Spreadsheet exercises based on physics examples and on error evaluation.Plotting functions, complex numbers, animations, integration and differentiation.Important elements of good communication in oral presentations, written reports(including laboratory reports).Radioactivity, decay modes of unstable nuclei. Naturally occurring and man-maderadionuclides.Interaction of radiation with materials; radiation dose and units, absorbed dose,exposure. Range of alphas, betas, gammas and neutrons in materials. Radiationshielding.Internal radiation dose, medical uses (therapy and imaging).Nuclear waste; high, intermediate, low level, options for storage.Radiation detection and measurement; simple radiation meters, personaldosimeters and film badges, spectroscopic systems.Activation analysis using thermal neutrons.Mass and energy, nuclear reactions.Fission; induction by thermal neutrons, chain reaction, moderators, control of thereaction, choice of materials. Safety aspects. Artificial transmutation.Fusion; nuclear reactions, simple description of fusion reactors (JET, ITER),applications of fusion reactions to astrophysics.

Page 21: ,'.'' ,'0''sdb/ModSpecs/2012/PHYSmod...Lec 15&16 Wk 9 Damped and Forced Harmonic Oscillator Resonance PC 8 Wk 9 Demonstration Experiment, Prediction and Writeup Lec 17&18 Wk 10 Gravitation

32. Recommended Texts

There is no one recommended reference book. Suitable texts include;

1) Nuclear Physics Principles and Applications : Lilley : ISBN 0471979368

2) University Physics : Young and Freedman : Pearson Addison-Wesley

ASSESSMENT

33. EXAM Duration Timing(Semester)

% of finalmark

Resit/resubmissionopportunity

Penalty for latesubmission

Notes

Written examination 90 minutes 2 35 August34. CONTINUOUS Duration Timing

(Semester)% of finalmark

Resit/resubmissionopportunity

Penalty for latesubmission

Notes

Problems set inworkshops

16 x 2hours

1+2 65 None: Exemptionapproved31/8/2011

As universitypolicy

This work is notmarkedanonymously. Sem 1:10 x 2 hr: 50%. Sem2: 6 x 2 hr: 15%.

MODULE SPECIFICATION

The information contained in this module specification was correct at the time of publication but may be subject tochange, either during the session because of unforeseen circumstances, or following review of the module at the end ofthe session. Queries about the module should be directed to the member of staff with responsibility for the module.

1. Module Title INTRODUCTION TO MEDICAL PHYSICS

2. Module Code PHYS136

3. Year 201213

4. OriginatingDepartment

Physics

5. Faculty Fac of Science & Engineering

6. Semester Second Semester

7. Credit Level Level One

8. Credit Value 7.5

9. External Examiner Physics External Examiner

10. Member of staff withresponsibility for themodule

Dr HC Boston Physics [email protected]

11. Module Moderator Prof PJ Nolan Physics [email protected]

12. Other ContributingDepartments

13. Other Staff Teachingon this Module

14. Board of Studies Physics

15. Mode of Delivery Lectures/Classes

16. Location Main Liverpool City Campus

Lectures Seminars Tutorials Lab/Practicals Fieldwork/Placement Other TOTAL

17. ContactHours

12 12Problems Classes

24

18. Non-contact hours 5119. TOTAL HOURS 75

Lectures Seminars Tutorials Lab/Practicals Fieldwork/Placement Other

20. Timetable(if known)

21. Pre-requisites before taking this module (other modules and/or general educational/academic requirements):

A-Level Physics or equivalent

22. Modules for which this module is a pre-requisite:

None

23. Co-requisite modules:

None

24. Linked Modules:

25. Programme(s) (including Year of Study) to which this module is available on a mandatory basis:

26. Programme(s) (including Year of Study) to which this module is available on a required basis:

Page 22: ,'.'' ,'0''sdb/ModSpecs/2012/PHYSmod...Lec 15&16 Wk 9 Damped and Forced Harmonic Oscillator Resonance PC 8 Wk 9 Demonstration Experiment, Prediction and Writeup Lec 17&18 Wk 10 Gravitation

Programme(s) (including Year of Study) to which this module is available on a required basis:

27. Programme(s) (including Year of Study) to which this module is available on an optional basis:

F303 (2) F350 (2) F3F5 (2) F3F7 (2) F300 (2) F352 (2) F390 (2) F521 (2)

MODULE DESCRIPTION

28. Aims

To provide the students with a broad introduction to medical physics.To provide the students with the physics basis for measurement techniques used in medicine.

29. Learning Outcomes

At the end of the module the student should have:

A basic understanding of the underlying physics properties and ideas that are utilised in medical physics.A basic knowledge of the physics involved in measurement techniques used in medicine.An understanding of the techniques used in measurements in medical applications.The ability to solve simple problems in medical physics.

30. Teaching and Learning Strategies

Students will attend 12 lectures and 6 x 2 hour problem classes in semester 2.

Private study time is provided for completion of assignments.

31. Syllabus

PHYS136 Physics of the body

Forces: loading of muscular and skeletal systems

Vision: basic optics of the eye, defects of vision and their correction.

Hearing: the ear as a detection system, sensitivity, frequency response, threshold ofhearing, defects of hearing.

Heart: the heart as an electromechanical pump, electrical signal generation,measurement of ECGs, defibrillation, blood pressure.

Measurement and imaging

Electrical signals and their generation and detection. Simple ECG machines andwaveforms.

Ultrasound imaging, generation and detection of ultrasound pulses (piezoelectricdevices), advantages and disadvantages.

Production of magnetic resonance imaging.

Properties of laser radiation and applications.

X-ray imaging, principles of production and detection, absorption and attenuation of X-rays. Imaging, contrast enhancement and photographic detection, diffraction enhancedimaging.

Nuclear imaging, CT, PET and SPECT. The decay process, interaction with matter,reconstruction of image.

32. Recommended Texts

There is no one recommended reference book. Suitable texts include;

1) "Physics in Nuclear Medicine" by Cherry, Sorenson and Phelps : ISBN 072168341X

2) "Nuclear Physics Principles and Applications" by Lilley : ISBN 0471979368

3) "University Physics" by Young and Freedman, published by Pearson Addison-Wesley

ASSESSMENT

33. EXAM Duration Timing(Semester)

% of finalmark

Resit/resubmissionopportunity

Penalty for latesubmission

Notes

Written Examination 90 minutes 2 70 August34. CONTINUOUS Duration Timing

(Semester)% of finalmark

Resit/resubmissionopportunity

Penalty for latesubmission

Notes

Problem Classes 6 x 2hours

2 30 Subsumed by resitexamination

As universitypolicy

This work is notmarked anonymously

Page 23: ,'.'' ,'0''sdb/ModSpecs/2012/PHYSmod...Lec 15&16 Wk 9 Damped and Forced Harmonic Oscillator Resonance PC 8 Wk 9 Demonstration Experiment, Prediction and Writeup Lec 17&18 Wk 10 Gravitation

MODULE SPECIFICATION

The information contained in this module specification was correct at the time of publication but may be subject tochange, either during the session because of unforeseen circumstances, or following review of the module at the end ofthe session. Queries about the module should be directed to the member of staff with responsibility for the module.

1. Module Title VISUAL OPTICS I

2. Module Code PHYS137

3. Year 201213

4. OriginatingDepartment

Physics

5. Faculty Fac of Science & Engineering

6. Semester First Semester

7. Credit Level Level One

8. Credit Value 7.5

9. External Examiner Physics External Examiner

10. Member of staff withresponsibility for themodule

Dr NK McCauley Physics [email protected]

11. Module Moderator Dr SD Barrett Physics [email protected]

12. Other ContributingDepartments

School of Health Sciences

13. Other Staff Teachingon this Module

Dr HL Vaughan Central Teaching Laboratory [email protected] HP Orton School of Health Sciences [email protected]

14. Board of Studies Physics

15. Mode of Delivery Lectures/Practical

16. Location Main Liverpool City Campus

Lectures Seminars Tutorials Lab/Practicals Fieldwork/Placement Other TOTAL

17. ContactHours

12 12 15 39

18. Non-contact hours 3619. TOTAL HOURS 75

Lectures Seminars Tutorials Lab/Practicals Fieldwork/Placement Other

20. Timetable(if known)

21. Pre-requisites before taking this module (other modules and/or general educational/academic requirements):

GCSE pass (grade C) in Mathematics

22. Modules for which this module is a pre-requisite:

PHYS237

23. Co-requisite modules:

24. Linked Modules:

25. Programme(s) (including Year of Study) to which this module is available on a mandatory basis:

B520 (1)

26. Programme(s) (including Year of Study) to which this module is available on a required basis:

27. Programme(s) (including Year of Study) to which this module is available on an optional basis:

MODULE DESCRIPTION

28. Aims

To provide the student with a basic knowledge of optics including the necessary mathematical (withemphasis on alegebra and trigonometry) and theoretical skillsTo provide opportunities to apply the knowledge gainedTo provide the student with practical experience of simple optical systems to illustrate and support lecturematerialTo provide appropriate preparation for the PHYS237 Visual Optics II module in Year 2

29. Learning Outcomes

At the end of the module the student will be able to:

Explain the principle of basic geometric optics: reflection and refraction of light and the optical principles ofthin lensesExplain the operation of the eye as an optical system

30. Teaching and Learning Strategies

The module will be delivered by way of a series of lectures with problem-solving sessions (tutorials within thePhysics Department and Division of Orthoptics). A laboratory session will also be run to demonstrate theprinciples from the lectures in a lab environment. Formative assessments will be offered to students in order tomonitor their own understanding and performance.

31. Syllabus

PHYS137 Mathematical Skills (1 hour)

Algebra and trigonometry

Geometric Optics (8 hours)

Reflection of light

Reflection at a plane surface (plane mirrors)Reflection at spherical reflecting surfaces (concave and convex mirrors) andimage formationCalculation of position of images and magnificationRay tracing of reflection

Refraction of light

Snell's Law of refractionRefractive indexTotal internal reflectionRefraction of light through a prismFactors affecting refraction through a prismNotation of prisms - prism dioptre, centrad, apparent deviation and refractingangleCalibration of prismsPrismatic effect of lenses (Prentice rule) with calculationsApplication of prisms in orthoptic practiceDecentration of lensesRefraction of light at a curved surfaceSpherical lenses - concave and convexCylindrical lenses - toric surfaces and toric lenses and interval of SturmApplication of cylindrical lenses to Maddox RodDispersion of light

Optical Properties of Thin Lenses

Page 24: ,'.'' ,'0''sdb/ModSpecs/2012/PHYSmod...Lec 15&16 Wk 9 Damped and Forced Harmonic Oscillator Resonance PC 8 Wk 9 Demonstration Experiment, Prediction and Writeup Lec 17&18 Wk 10 Gravitation

Ray tracing through a thin lensThin lens formulaDioptric power of lenses - vergenceMagnification formulae (linear and angular)Spherical lens decentration and prism powerCalculations and ray tracings

The Eye as a Thick Lens and Refraction by the Eye (3 hours)

Thick lens theory - cardinal points and the thick lens in airCombination of lenses: as a thick lens and ray tracing through a thick lensSchematic eyeReduced eye and construction of retinal imageRefractive errors - myopia and hypermetropia, asigmatism and correcting lensesCatoptric images - Purkinje-Sanson

32. Recommended Texts

"Clinical Optics" by A R Elkington and HJ Frank, published by Blackwell Scientific Publishing

"Duke Elder's Practice of Refraction" Revised by D Abrams, published by Churchill Livingstone. Out of Print,available in the library.

"Physics for Opthalmologists" Edited by D J Coster, published by Churchill Livingstone

ASSESSMENT

33. EXAM Duration Timing(Semester)

% of finalmark

Resit/resubmissionopportunity

Penalty for latesubmission

Notes

Written Examination 1 hour 1 70 August34. CONTINUOUS Duration Timing

(Semester)% of finalmark

Resit/resubmissionopportunity

Penalty for latesubmission

Notes

Laboratory Reports 1 30 Summer vacation As universitypolicy

MODULE SPECIFICATION

The information contained in this module specification was correct at the time of publication but may be subject tochange, either during the session because of unforeseen circumstances, or following review of the module at the end ofthe session. Queries about the module should be directed to the member of staff with responsibility for the module.

1. Module Title PRACTICAL SKILLS FOR MATHEMATICAL PHYSICS

2. Module Code PHYS156

3. Year 201213

4. OriginatingDepartment

Physics

5. Faculty Fac of Science & Engineering

6. Semester Whole Session

7. Credit Level Level One

8. Credit Value 15

9. External Examiner Physics External Examiner

10. Member of staff withresponsibility for themodule

Dr HL Vaughan Central Teaching Laboratory [email protected]

11. Module Moderator Dr L Moran Physics [email protected]

12. Other ContributingDepartments

13. Other Staff Teachingon this Module

14. Board of Studies Physics

15. Mode of Delivery Lectures/Tutorials/Practicals

16. Location Main Liverpool City Campus

Lectures Seminars Tutorials Lab/Practicals Fieldwork/Placement Other TOTAL

17. ContactHours

15= 10 x (1 or 2)lectures/week (S1)

20= 10 x 2-hourworkshops (S1)

72(S2)

107

18. Non-contact hours 4319. TOTAL HOURS 150

Lectures Seminars Tutorials Lab/Practicals Fieldwork/Placement Other

20. Timetable(if known)

21. Pre-requisites before taking this module (other modules and/or general educational/academic requirements):

Physics A Level (or equivalent)

22. Modules for which this module is a pre-requisite:

23. Co-requisite modules:

None

24. Linked Modules:

25. Programme(s) (including Year of Study) to which this module is available on a mandatory basis:

26. Programme(s) (including Year of Study) to which this module is available on a required basis:

Page 25: ,'.'' ,'0''sdb/ModSpecs/2012/PHYSmod...Lec 15&16 Wk 9 Damped and Forced Harmonic Oscillator Resonance PC 8 Wk 9 Demonstration Experiment, Prediction and Writeup Lec 17&18 Wk 10 Gravitation

Programme(s) (including Year of Study) to which this module is available on a required basis:

FGH1 (1) FG31 (1) F344 (1)

27. Programme(s) (including Year of Study) to which this module is available on an optional basis:

MODULE DESCRIPTION

28. Aims

To develop skills with spreadsheetsTo develop skills in using computers to perform mathematical calculationsTo illustrate the insight into physics which can be obtained by exploiting computational software packagesTo improve science students' skills in communicating scientific information in appropriate written and oralformatsTo provide a core of essential introductory laboratory methods which overlap and develop from A-levelTo introduce the basis of experimental techniques in physical measurement, the use of computertechniques in analysis and to provide experience doing experiments, keeping records and wrting reports

29. Learning Outcomes

At the end of the module the student should have:

An ability to use spreadsheets and mathematical packages to calculate and graph mathematicalequationsAn ability to apply mathematical software packages to physics problemsAn appreciation of how to present results by computerThe ability to communicate more confidentlyAn understanding of some of the key factors in successful communicationExperienced the practical nature of physicsDeveloped an awareness of the importance of accurate experimentation, particularly obervation andrecord keepingDeveloped the ability to plan, execute and report on the results of an investigation using appropriateanalysis of the data and associated uncertaintiesDeveloped the practical and technical skill required for physics experimentation and an appreciation of theimportance of a systematic approach to experimental measurement.Developed problem solving skills of a practical natureDeveloped analytical skills in the analysis of the dataDeveloped communication skills in the presentation of the investigation in a clear and logical mannerDeveloped investgative skills in performing the experiment and extracting information from varioussources with which to compare the resultsDeveloped the ability to organise their time and meet deadlines

30. Teaching and Learning Strategies

Students will attend 15 lectures and 10 x 2 hour training sessions on applications of PCs and workshops oncommunication skills in Physics in semester 1.

Students will attend 12 x 6 hour practical classes in semester 2.

Private study time is provided for completion of assignments.

31. Syllabus

Skills sessions

Spreadsheet exercises based on physics examples and on error evaluation.Plotting functions, complex numbers, animations, integration and differentiation.Important elements of good communication in oral presentations, written reports(including laboratory reports).

Practical sessions

Introduction to Experimental Errors with a simple pendulum and a geiger counter.Error Analysis via selected exercisesHookes LawLiquid Nitrogen ExperimentMilikans Experiment

Properties of the ElectronCapacitance and ElectrostaticsElectromagnetic InductionDiffraction and Interference of MicrowavesStefan's LawAbsorption of gamma raysRectification and amplification of AC signals

32. Recommended Texts

None

ASSESSMENT

33. EXAM Duration Timing(Semester)

% of finalmark

Resit/resubmissionopportunity

Penalty for latesubmission

Notes

34. CONTINUOUS Duration Timing

(Semester)% of finalmark

Resit/resubmissionopportunity

Penalty for latesubmission

Notes

Problems set inworkshops

1 50 Exemption appliedfor

As universitypolicy

Students arerequired to achieve apass mark in thiscomponent(Ordinance 15). Thiswork is not markedanonymously.

Reports on practicalwork

2 50 Exemption appliedfor

As universitypolicy

Students arerequired to achieve apass mark in thiscomponent(Ordinance 15). Thiswork is not markedanonymously.

Page 26: ,'.'' ,'0''sdb/ModSpecs/2012/PHYSmod...Lec 15&16 Wk 9 Damped and Forced Harmonic Oscillator Resonance PC 8 Wk 9 Demonstration Experiment, Prediction and Writeup Lec 17&18 Wk 10 Gravitation

MODULE SPECIFICATION

The information contained in this module specification was correct at the time of publication but may be subject tochange, either during the session because of unforeseen circumstances, or following review of the module at the end ofthe session. Queries about the module should be directed to the member of staff with responsibility for the module.

1. Module Title ELECTROMAGNETISM

2. Module Code PHYS201

3. Year 201213

4. OriginatingDepartment

Physics

5. Faculty Fac of Science & Engineering

6. Semester First Semester

7. Credit Level Level Two

8. Credit Value 15

9. External Examiner Physics External Examiner

10. Member of staff withresponsibility for themodule

Prof CT Touramanis Physics [email protected]

11. Module Moderator Dr A Wolski Physics [email protected]

12. Other ContributingDepartments

13. Other Staff Teachingon this Module

14. Board of Studies Physics

15. Mode of Delivery Lectures/Classes

16. Location Main Liverpool City Campus

Lectures Seminars Tutorials Lab/Practicals Fieldwork/Placement Other TOTAL

17. ContactHours

24= 12 x 2lectures/week

24= 12 x 2-hourworkshops

48

18. Non-contact hours 10219. TOTAL HOURS 150

Lectures Seminars Tutorials Lab/Practicals Fieldwork/Placement Other

20. Timetable(if known)

2 1hlectureseach week

Problem Classes: 1 2hr sloteach week on a later day thanthe lectures, in an appropriatelearning environment

21. Pre-requisites before taking this module (other modules and/or general educational/academic requirements):

Physics A Level (or equivalent)

22. Modules for which this module is a pre-requisite:

PHYS370

23. Co-requisite modules:

None

24. Linked Modules:

25. Programme(s) (including Year of Study) to which this module is available on a mandatory basis:

26. Programme(s) (including Year of Study) to which this module is available on a required basis:

F300 (2) F303 (2) F352 (2) F350 (2) F3F5 (2) F521 (2) F390 (2) FGH1 (2) FG31 (2) F344 (2)

27. Programme(s) (including Year of Study) to which this module is available on an optional basis:

MODULE DESCRIPTION

28. Aims

To introduce the fundamental concepts and principles of electrostatics, magnetostatics, electromagnetismand Maxwell's equations, and electromagnetic waves.To introduce differential vector analysis in the context of electromagnetism.To introduce circuit principles and analysis (EMF, Ohm's law, Kirchhoff's rules, RC and RLC circuits)To introduce the formulation fo Maxwell's equations in the presence of dielectric and magnetic materials.To develop the ability of students to apply Maxwell's equations to simple problems involving dielectric andmagnetic materials.To develop the concepts of field theories in Physics using electromagnetism as an example.To introduce light as an electromagnetic wave.

29. Learning Outcomes

At the end of the module the student should be able to:

Demonstrate a good knowledge of the laws of electromagnetism and an understanding of the practicalmeaning of Maxwell's equations in integral and differential forms.Apply differential vector analysis to electromagnetism.Demonstrate simple knowledge and understanding of how the presence of matter affects electrostaticsand magnetostatics, and the ability to solve simple problems in these situations.Demonstrate knowledge and understanding of how the laws are altered in the case of non-static electricand magnetic fields and the ability to solve simple problems in these situations.

30. Teaching and Learning Strategies

The course will consist of a combination of lectures and problems classes. The lectures are designed to presentstudents with the main concepts of electromagnetism and illustrate these with reference to experiments, and todevelop, using appropriate mathematical tools, a rigorous framework comprising the appropriate laws andMaxwell's equations.

The problems classes give the students the opportunity to investigate further the concepts discussed in thelectures in an environment in which group work is encouraged and expert supervision is available. Theassessment will contain significant elements of peer marking. The intellectual focus is on transfer of knowledgeto new situations and application of physical insights to new problems.

Students are also expected to complete further problems as exercises on an individual basis using MasteringPhysics online Problems. The intellectual focus will be on exercising known material.

31. Syllabus

Electric charge, Coulomb’s law, Charge densityElectric field, Principle of SuperpositionElectric flux, Gauss’ law (integral form)Mutual potential energy of point charges, electric potentialCalculating the field from the potential (gradient)Circulation, charges on conductorsGauss’ law in differential form (divergence)Circulation law in differential form (curl)Poisson’s and Laplace’s laws and solutionsElectric dipoleElectrostatics and conductors, method of imagesGauss’ and Stokes’ theoremsEMF, potential difference, electric current, current density, resistance, Ohm’s lawCircuits, Kirkhhoff’s rulesCapacitance, calculation of capacitance for simple cases, RC circuitsDielectrics, polarization, electric displacement field

Page 27: ,'.'' ,'0''sdb/ModSpecs/2012/PHYSmod...Lec 15&16 Wk 9 Damped and Forced Harmonic Oscillator Resonance PC 8 Wk 9 Demonstration Experiment, Prediction and Writeup Lec 17&18 Wk 10 Gravitation

Capacitance in the presence of dielectrics, force on a dielectricMagnetism, magnetic field, Biot-Savart lawLorentz force, force between currentsCharged particle motion in magnetic field, velocity filterMagnetic dipole field, Ampere’s law in integral and differential formsMaxwell’s equations in vacuum for steady conditionsVector potentialMagnetic materials, magnetization, magnetic field strengthMaxwell’s equations in the presence of materials for steady conditionsMotion of conductors inside magnetic fields, Faraday’s and Lenz’s lawsTime-varying fields, Maxwell’s equations for the most general caseDerivation of electromagnetic waves from Maxwell’s equations, speed of lightLCR circuits

32. Recommended Texts

W.J. Duffin, "Electricity and Magnetism", 4th ed., McGraw-Hill

D.J. Griffiths, "Introduction to Electrodynamics", 3rd ed., Prentice Hall

Access Code for Mastering Physics required

ASSESSMENT

33. EXAM Duration Timing(Semester)

% of finalmark

Resit/resubmissionopportunity

Penalty for latesubmission

Notes

Written examination 3 hours 1 70 August34. CONTINUOUS Duration Timing

(Semester)% of finalmark

Resit/resubmissionopportunity

Penalty for latesubmission

Notes

Problems set inworkshops

12 x 2hours

1 30 Subsumed by resitexamination

As universitypolicy

This work is notmarked anonymously

MODULE SPECIFICATION

The information contained in this module specification was correct at the time of publication but may be subject tochange, either during the session because of unforeseen circumstances, or following review of the module at the end ofthe session. Queries about the module should be directed to the member of staff with responsibility for the module.

1. Module Title CONDENSED MATTER PHYSICS

2. Module Code PHYS202

3. Year 201213

4. OriginatingDepartment

Physics

5. Faculty Fac of Science & Engineering

6. Semester First Semester

7. Credit Level Level Two

8. Credit Value 15

9. External Examiner Physics External Examiner

10. Member of staff withresponsibility for themodule

Dr VR Dhanak Physics [email protected]

11. Module Moderator Prof RN McGrath Physics [email protected]

12. Other ContributingDepartments

13. Other Staff Teachingon this Module

14. Board of Studies Physics

15. Mode of Delivery Lectures/Classes

16. Location Main Liverpool City Campus

Lectures Seminars Tutorials Lab/Practicals Fieldwork/Placement Other TOTAL

17. ContactHours

24One 2 hour slot eachweek. Total 12x2lectures

24Problemclasses:One 2hour sloteveryweek

48

18. Non-contact hours 10219. TOTAL HOURS 150

Lectures Seminars Tutorials Lab/Practicals Fieldwork/Placement Other

20. Timetable(if known)

21. Pre-requisites before taking this module (other modules and/or general educational/academic requirements):

A level Physics

22. Modules for which this module is a pre-requisite:

23. Co-requisite modules:

24. Linked Modules:

Page 28: ,'.'' ,'0''sdb/ModSpecs/2012/PHYSmod...Lec 15&16 Wk 9 Damped and Forced Harmonic Oscillator Resonance PC 8 Wk 9 Demonstration Experiment, Prediction and Writeup Lec 17&18 Wk 10 Gravitation

25. Programme(s) (including Year of Study) to which this module is available on a mandatory basis:

26. Programme(s) (including Year of Study) to which this module is available on a required basis:

F303 (2) F352 (2) F300 (2) F521 (2) F3F5 (2) F390 (2) F350 (2) FG31 (2) FGH1 (2) F344 (2)

27. Programme(s) (including Year of Study) to which this module is available on an optional basis:

MODULE DESCRIPTION

28. Aims

The aims of Phys202 are to introduce the most important and basic concepts in condensed matter physicsrelating to the different materials we commonly see in the world around us. Condensed matter physics is one ofthe most active areas of research in modern physics, whose scope is extremely broad. The ultimate aim of thiscourse is to introduce its central ideas and methodology to the students.

Condensed matter refers to both liquids and solids and all kinds of other forms of matter in between those twoextremes, generally known as “soft matter". While the course will touch on liquids, the emphasis will be oncrystalline solids, including some nano-materials. The reason for focusing on crystals is that the periodicity of acrystal is what allows us to make progress in developing a theory for various phenomena in solids based on firstprinciples. Two important concepts are:

• the electronic states of electrons in a solid and

• the vibrations of atoms in the solid.

The description of these ideas basically refer to the theory of electronic band structure and the theory ofphonons. These concepts form the basis for understanding a wide range of phenomena including how the atomsbond together to form the crystal, what are some basic statistical properties like specific heat, how electronsmove in solids and electronic transport, why are some materials metals and others semiconductors andinsulators, and how do solids interact with electromagnetic fields. The course will also introduce optical andmagnetic properties in solids, scattering phenomena, thermal conductivity and effect of defects in solids,semiconductors, magnetism and go beyond the free electron model to touch on intriguing effects such assuperconductivity.

29. Learning Outcomes

On satisfying the requirements of this course, students will have the knowledge and skills to

! Establish a foundation in basic crystallography.

! Establish an understanding of electron configuration in atoms and in condensed matter in terms of bonding,and relating them to the band structure description.

! Understand how different kinds of matter are described mathematically and how material properties can bepredicted.

! Understand basic transport properties, both electronic and thermal, in solids.

! Become familiar with the language of condensed matter and key theories and concepts, ultimately enablingstudents to read and understand research papers.

30. Teaching and Learning Strategies

The course will consist of a combination of lectures and problem classes. The lectures are designed to presentstudents with the basic concepts of condensed matter physics (CMP), with emphasis on solid crystallinematerials. A full set of lecture notes will be provided while the interested students will be encouraged to look uptexts for more advanced topics in this one of the most important fields in modern physics. Problem classes givethe students the opportunity to test their understanding of the concepts discussed in the lectures, and aredesigned to give continous feedback.

31. Syllabus

Overview

1 Structure

Types of bonding in solids: hybridization, covalent, ionic, metallic, Van der Waals.Packing of spheres; close packed crystal structures

Lattice and basis vectors for (principally) cubic crystalsScattering of waves from a crystal: Fourier Transform of charge density, leadingto Bragg's Law, reciprocal lattice, structure factor, and atomic form factorX-ray, neutron and electron scattering experimentsPolymorphism: e.g. in C diamond, graphite, fullerenesOther common crystals: zinc blende, rutile, perovskiteReal crystals: defects, vacancies, dislocations, grains

2 Dynamics

Phonons as harmonic excitations, dispersion curves for diatomic crystals,acoustic and optic modes, extension to 3D: longitudinal and transverse branchesMeasurement of phonon frequencies: inelastic neutron scattering, Raman, IRabsorptionHeat capacity: Einstein and Debye approx., electronicAnharmonicity: phonon scattering, thermal conduction, thermal expansionElectronic Structure: Bonding in solidsMetals: The Free-Electron Model, Wavefunction in a periodic lattice, Energybands, Density of states, Fermi surface, electronic conduction, Hall effect.Metals, Insulators and SemiconductorsElectrons in nanostructuresBand structure of Graphene, carbon nanotubes

3 Semiconductors

Semiconductor band structureIntrinsic and extrinsic semiconductorsSemiconductor propertiesLower-dimensional semiconductors (graphene, semiconducting polymers)Electrical conductivityOptical properties, excitons

4 Basic Magnetism

Aspects of magnetismOrigins of magnetic propertiesDiamagnetic susceptibilityParamagnetism, ferromagnetismCurie temperatureMagnetoresistance

5 Superconductivity

Properties of superconductors: onset of zero resistance and transitiontemperature Tc. diamagnetism, penetration depth, critical magnetic field HcTheory of superconductors (outline): London theory, two fluid model, Bardeen-Cooper-Schrieffer (BCS) microscopic theory

Lec 1-2 Wk 1 What is condensed matter physics?Chemical bonding: simplest example H2, tight-binding approximation,Hybridization and covalent bondingCharge transfer, ionic bondingJellium model and metallic bondingVan der Waals bondingCohesive energy of a solidCrystal structure: translation symmetry and Bravais latticesBasis and unit cellClassifying lattices

PC 1 Wk 1 Classifying materials by bonding typesLattice symmetry

Lec 3-4 Wk 2 Classifying latticesMore crystal structures: Silicon, CsCl, NaCl, Zinc BlendDiffraction and the reciprocal latticeScattering of a plane wave by a crystalSum over lattice points

Page 29: ,'.'' ,'0''sdb/ModSpecs/2012/PHYSmod...Lec 15&16 Wk 9 Damped and Forced Harmonic Oscillator Resonance PC 8 Wk 9 Demonstration Experiment, Prediction and Writeup Lec 17&18 Wk 10 Gravitation

Reciprocal lattice vectors, Brilloin zones 2-D, 3-DLattice planes and Miller indicesBragg’s lawStructure factor: monoatomic and non-monoatomic structure

PC 2 Wk 2 Reciprocal latticeDiffractionBragg’s lawStructure factor examples: CsCl, silicon

Lec 5-6 Wk 3 Diffraction experimentsX-Ray diffraction: production and detection of X-raysInteraction of X-rays with crystalsForm factorNeutron diffraction: production and detection of neutronsElectron diffractionExperimental arrangements for diffraction

PC 3 Wk 3 DiffractionX-rays, neutrons, electronsDiffraction in 2-D: Ewald construction

Lec 7-8 Wk 4 Lattice dynamics1-D chain of identical atomsDiatomic linear crystalLinear crystal – with one type of atom and two different springsVibrations in 3-DQuantum effects in lattice dynamicsExamples of phonon-dispersion relationsSpecific heatDensity of states: Einstein and Debye models

PC 4 Wk 4 Specific heatPhonons: harmonic oscillators

Lec 9-10 Wk 5 MetalsThe free electron modelOne-electron statesResults of the free electron modelWavefunctions in a periodic potentialFree electron states in 1-D k-spaceE-k relationshipsNearly free electron modelEnergy bands

PC 5 Wk 5 E-k relationships

Lec 11-12 Wk 6 Energy bands continuedCrystal velocity and effective massMetals, insulators, semiconductorsApplications of NFE model to metalsFermi surfaceExamples: Alkali metals, Noble metalsEffective mass, holesDensity of statesMetal properties, specific heat

PC 6 Wk 6 Fermi velocityDensity of statesElectronic specific heat

Lec 13-14 Wk 7Density of states in reduced dimensions

Density of states in reduced dimensionsElectrons in nanostructuresParticle in a boxElectron tunnellingPrinciple of the STM

PC 7 Wk 7 Particle in a box energiesElectron tunnellingDensity of states in nanostructures

Lec 15-16 Wk 8 Band structure determinationE-k relationship 1-D chain of atoms, Pierls distortionBand structure of graphene

PC 8 Wk 8 Determination of density of statesDetermination of number of conduction electronsDensity of states in reduced dimensions

Lec 17-18 Wk 9 Transport properties: Drude model, conductivityThermal conductivityImpurity scatteringElectron-phonon couplingBallistic transportHall effect

PC 9 Wk 9 Electrical conductivityThermal conductivityHall effect

Lec 19-20 Wk 10 SemiconductorsSemiconductor band structureIntrinsic semiconductorsExtrinsic semiconductorsLower-dimensional semiconductors (graphene, semiconducting polymers)Semiconductor propertiesElectrical conductivity

PC 10 Wk 10 Semiconductor carrier concentrationTemperature dependence of carrier concentration

Lec 21-22 Wk 11 MagnetismOrigins of magnetic propertiesDiamagnetic susceptibilityParamagnetism, ferromagnetismElectron correlations and basics of superconductivitySpin-orbit coupling

PC 11Wk 11 Curie TemperatureMagnetic energy

Lec 23-24 Wk 12 Other soft condensed matter: liquid crystals, polymersTransport in moleculesTransition metal oxidesGlasses

PC 12 Wk 12 Soft condensed matter

32. Recommended Texts

There is no single text book that covers everything in Condensed Matter Physics. Students should have asreference more than one book. Listed below are some of the textbooks recommended for this course.

1. Condensed Matter Physics, by M. P. Marder (Wiley): This book is a very recent publication and has a rather

Page 30: ,'.'' ,'0''sdb/ModSpecs/2012/PHYSmod...Lec 15&16 Wk 9 Damped and Forced Harmonic Oscillator Resonance PC 8 Wk 9 Demonstration Experiment, Prediction and Writeup Lec 17&18 Wk 10 Gravitation

1. Condensed Matter Physics, by M. P. Marder (Wiley): This book is a very recent publication and has a ratherbroad and up-to date coverage of condensed matter physics. Some important topics are only touched upon but alarge number are detailed, with calculations. Conventional coverage of crystalline materials and electronicstructure. Generally good. Second edition came out in 2010.

2. Introduction to Solid State Physics, by Charles Kittel: Concise and detailed, but encyclopaedic and can berather off-putting. But generations of students have read this as a first choice and it is in its eighth edition.

3. Principles of the theory of solids, by J. M. Ziman: Concise but more advanced level, focussing on crystallinesolids. It is quite old and does not cover the most important discoveries of the past twenty years. However, thebasics are covered carefully. The book is aimed at graduate and advanced undergraduate level.

4. Solid State Physics by Ashcroft and Mermin: This is another classic book for generations of students.However, it is old and aimed at a more advanced undergraduate level.

ASSESSMENT

33. EXAM Duration Timing(Semester)

% of finalmark

Resit/resubmissionopportunity

Penalty for latesubmission

Notes

Written examination 3 hours 1 70 August34. CONTINUOUS Duration Timing

(Semester)% of finalmark

Resit/resubmissionopportunity

Penalty for latesubmission

Notes

Problems set inworkshops

12 x 2hours

1 30 Subsumed by resitexamination

As universitypolicy

This work is notmarked anonymously

MODULE SPECIFICATION

The information contained in this module specification was correct at the time of publication but may be subject tochange, either during the session because of unforeseen circumstances, or following review of the module at the end ofthe session. Queries about the module should be directed to the member of staff with responsibility for the module.

1. Module Title QUANTUM AND ATOMIC PHYSICS

2. Module Code PHYS203

3. Year 201213

4. OriginatingDepartment

Physics

5. Faculty Fac of Science & Engineering

6. Semester Second Semester

7. Credit Level Level Two

8. Credit Value 15

9. External Examiner Physics External Examiner

10. Member of staff withresponsibility for themodule

Dr ES Paul Physics [email protected]

11. Module Moderator Prof M Klein Physics [email protected]

12. Other ContributingDepartments

13. Other Staff Teachingon this Module

14. Board of Studies Physics

15. Mode of Delivery Lectures/Classes

16. Location Main Liverpool City Campus

Lectures Seminars Tutorials Lab/Practicals Fieldwork/Placement Other TOTAL

17. ContactHours

24= 12 x 2lectures/week

24= 12 x 2-hourworkshops

48

18. Non-contact hours 10219. TOTAL HOURS 150

Lectures Seminars Tutorials Lab/Practicals Fieldwork/Placement Other

20. Timetable(if known)

1 2hr (doublelecture) slot eachweek

Problem Classes: 1 2hrslot each week on a laterday than the lectures, inan appropriate learningenvironment

21. Pre-requisites before taking this module (other modules and/or general educational/academic requirements):

PHYS104

22. Modules for which this module is a pre-requisite:

PHYS361

23. Co-requisite modules:

None

24. Linked Modules:

Page 31: ,'.'' ,'0''sdb/ModSpecs/2012/PHYSmod...Lec 15&16 Wk 9 Damped and Forced Harmonic Oscillator Resonance PC 8 Wk 9 Demonstration Experiment, Prediction and Writeup Lec 17&18 Wk 10 Gravitation

25. Programme(s) (including Year of Study) to which this module is available on a mandatory basis:

26. Programme(s) (including Year of Study) to which this module is available on a required basis:

F300 (2) F303 (2) F352 (2) F350 (2) F3F5 (2) F521 (2) F390 (2) FGH1 (2) F344 (2) FG31 (2)

27. Programme(s) (including Year of Study) to which this module is available on an optional basis:

MODULE DESCRIPTION

28. Aims

To introduce students to the concepts of quantum theory.To show how Schrodinger's equation is applied to particle flux and to bound states.To show how quantum ideas provide an understanding of atomic structure.

29. Learning Outcomes

At the end of the module the student should have:

An understanding of the reasons why microscopic systems require quantum description and statisticalinterpretation.Knowledge of the Schrodinger equation and how it is formulated to describe simple physical systems.Understanding of the basic technique of using Schrodinger's equation and ability to determine solutions insimple cases.Understanding of how orbital angular momentum is described in quantum mechanics and why there is aneed for spin.Understanding how the formalism of quantum mechanics describes the structure of atomic hydrogen and,schematically, how more complex atoms are described.

30. Teaching and Learning Strategies

The course will consist of a combination of lectures and problems classes. The lectures are designed to presentstudents with the main concepts of quantum mechanics, particularly wave mechanics and the Schrodingerequation, and illustrate these with reference to simple systems, building up to a description of the Hydrogen atomand many-electron atoms.

The problems classes give the students the opportunity to investigate further the concepts discussed in thelectures in an environment in which group work is encouraged and expert supervision is available. Theassessment will contain significant elements of peer marking. The intellectual focus is on transfer of knowledgeto new situations and application of physical insights to new problems.

31. Syllabus

Overview:

Breakdown of classical physics, quantisation, discrete energy levelsWaveforms, Operators, MeasurementForces, potential energy, de Broglie waveWave equation, eigenvalue equation, stationary statesSchrodinger equation, wave function, probability densityBound states, localisation, potential wellsQuantum flux, scattering at potential stepsPotential barrier, penetration and tunnellingAtomic structure, central potentials, angular momentum, hydrogen atomMany-electron atoms, intrinsic spin, quantum numbersMagnetic dipole moments, spin-orbit energy, atomic fine structureFirst order perturbation theory, Zeeman effect

Lec 1&2 Wk 1 Blackbody radiation, ultraviolet catastropheDiscrete energy levels, atomic line spectraWave-particle duality

PC 1 Wk 1Blackbody radiation

Blackbody radiationComplex exponential waveforms

Lec 3&4 Wk 2 WaveformsOperators and observablesMeasurement, uncertainty principle

PC 2 Wk 2 Operators, commutatorsOperator equation

Lec 5&6 Wk 3 Forces and potential energy, total energyEnergy diagrams, potential wellsFree particle

PC 3 Wk 3 De Broglie wave, momentum operatorsLocalisation, normalisation

Lec 7&8 Wk 4 Wave equation, simplest wave functionEigenvalue equation, stationary statesWave packet

PC 4 Wk 4 Wave functionsStationary states

Lec 9&10 Wk 5 Time dependent Schrodinger equationTime independent Schrodinger equationProbability density

PC 5 Wk 5 Wave functions and probability densities

Lec 11&12 Wk 6 Bound states, localisationSquare well potentialHarmonic oscillator, diatomic molecule

PC 6 Wk 6 Harmonic oscillator, wave functions and energiesZero point energy, uncertainty principle

Lec 13&14 Wk 7 Quantum scatteringQuantum flux conservationPotential steps

PC 7 Wk 7 Probability current density, conservationContinuity of wave functions across potential step boundaries

Lec 15&16 Wk 8 Potential steps and barriersReflection and transmission of quantum fluxBarrier penetration and tunnelling

PC 8 Wk 8 Transmission and reflection of flux at potential stepsPenetration depth

Lec 17&18 Wk 9 3-D potentials and energy degeneraciesAngular momentum and central potentialsHydrogen atom

PC 9 Wk 9 Angular momentum operators3-D harmonic oscillator

Lec 19&20 Wk 10 Many electron atoms, quantum numbers

Page 32: ,'.'' ,'0''sdb/ModSpecs/2012/PHYSmod...Lec 15&16 Wk 9 Damped and Forced Harmonic Oscillator Resonance PC 8 Wk 9 Demonstration Experiment, Prediction and Writeup Lec 17&18 Wk 10 Gravitation

Stern Gerlach experiment, intrinsic spinElectron shells, configurations

PC 10 Wk 10 Elements and electronic configurationsElectronic transitions, spectroscopy

Lec 21&22 Wk 11 Spin-orbit coupling, H atom fine structurePeriodic table, exclusion principleZeeman effect, spatial quantisation

PC 11 Wk 11 Spectroscopic notation, transitionsZeeman splitting

Lec 23&24 Wk 12 First order perturbation theoryZeeman effect

PC 12 Wk 12 General revision

32. Recommended Texts

"Introduction to Quantum Mechanics" by A.C. Phillips, published by Wiley"Quantum Mechanics Demystified" by D. McMahon, published by McGraw Hill"Quantum Mechanics" Schaum's Easy Outlines, published by McGraw Hill

ASSESSMENT

33. EXAM Duration Timing(Semester)

% of finalmark

Resit/resubmissionopportunity

Penalty for latesubmission

Notes

Written examination 3 hours 2 70 August34. CONTINUOUS Duration Timing

(Semester)% of finalmark

Resit/resubmissionopportunity

Penalty for latesubmission

Notes

Problems set inworkshops

12 x 2hours

2 30 Subsumed by resitexamination

As universitypolicy

This work is notmarked anonymously

MODULE SPECIFICATION

The information contained in this module specification was correct at the time of publication but may be subject tochange, either during the session because of unforeseen circumstances, or following review of the module at the end ofthe session. Queries about the module should be directed to the member of staff with responsibility for the module.

1. Module Title NUCLEAR AND PARTICLE PHYSICS

2. Module Code PHYS204

3. Year 201213

4. OriginatingDepartment

Physics

5. Faculty Fac of Science & Engineering

6. Semester Second Semester

7. Credit Level Level Two

8. Credit Value 15

9. External Examiner Physics External Examiner

10. Member of staff withresponsibility for themodule

Dr A Mehta Physics [email protected]

11. Module Moderator Dr ES Paul Physics [email protected]

12. Other ContributingDepartments

13. Other Staff Teachingon this Module

14. Board of Studies Physics

15. Mode of Delivery Lectures/Classes

16. Location Main Liverpool City Campus

Lectures Seminars Tutorials Lab/Practicals Fieldwork/Placement Other TOTAL

17. ContactHours

24= 12 x 2lectures/week

24= 12 x 2-hourworkshops

48

18. Non-contact hours 10219. TOTAL HOURS 150

Lectures Seminars Tutorials Lab/Practicals Fieldwork/Placement Other

20. Timetable(if known)

1 2hr (doublelecture) slot eachweek

Problem Classes: 1 2hrslot each week on a laterday than the lectures, inan appropriate learningenvironment

21. Pre-requisites before taking this module (other modules and/or general educational/academic requirements):

Physics A Level (or equivalent)

22. Modules for which this module is a pre-requisite:

None

23. Co-requisite modules:

None

24. Linked Modules:

Page 33: ,'.'' ,'0''sdb/ModSpecs/2012/PHYSmod...Lec 15&16 Wk 9 Damped and Forced Harmonic Oscillator Resonance PC 8 Wk 9 Demonstration Experiment, Prediction and Writeup Lec 17&18 Wk 10 Gravitation

25. Programme(s) (including Year of Study) to which this module is available on a mandatory basis:

26. Programme(s) (including Year of Study) to which this module is available on a required basis:

F300 (2) F303 (2) F352 (2) F350 (2) F3F5 (2) F521 (2) F390 (2) FG31 (2) FGH1 (2) F344 (2)

27. Programme(s) (including Year of Study) to which this module is available on an optional basis:

MODULE DESCRIPTION

28. Aims

To introduce Rutherford and related scattering.To introduce nuclear size, mass and decay modesTo provide some applications and examples of nuclear physicsTo introduce particle physics, including interactions, reactions and decayTo show some recent experimental discoveriesTo introduce relativistic 4-vectors for applications to collision problems

29. Learning Outcomes

At the end of the module the student should have:

basic understanding of Rutherford, electron on neutron scatteringunderstanding of the basic principles that determine nuclear size, mass and decay modesknowledge of examples and applications of nuclear physicsknowledge of elementary particles and their interactionsbasic understanding of relativistic 4-vectors

30. Teaching and Learning Strategies

The course will consist of a combination of lectures and problems classes. The lectures are designed to presentstudents with the main concepts of particle and nuclear physics and illustrate these with examples.

The problems classes give the students the opportunity to investigate further the concepts discussed in thelectures.

Students are also expected to complete further problems as exercises on an individual basis using MasteringPhysics online Problems; these are marked and feedback is provided through Mastering Physics.

31. Syllabus

Size and Shape of Nuclei

Rutherford scatteringElectron+neutron scatteringNuclear size

Nuclear Masses

Masses of nucleiBinding energyLiquid drop modelSemi-empirical mass formula

Nuclear Decays

Alpha, beta and gamma decaysNuclear StabilityOther decays

Nuclear Processes and Applications

DatingStellar evolutionNuclear power stations

Particle Physics Introduction

Particle propertiesLeptons. quarks and hadronsColourForces and interactions

Particle Decays and Reactions

Particle widthsConservation lawsParticle reactions and decays

Relativistic Mechanics

Principle of invarianceIntroduction to 4-vectorsRelativistic Collisions

Recent Discoveries in Particle Physics

Neutrino masses and oscillationsDiscovery of the top quarkMeasurement of the top and W massesStructure of the protonSearch for Higgs and super-symmetry

32. Recommended Texts

"Quantum Physics of Atoms, Molecules, Solids, Nuclei and Particles" by Eisberg and Resnick, published byWiley

Access Code for Mastering Physics required

ASSESSMENT

33. EXAM Duration Timing(Semester)

% of finalmark

Resit/resubmissionopportunity

Penalty for latesubmission

Notes

Written examination 3 hours 2 70 August34. CONTINUOUS Duration Timing

(Semester)% of finalmark

Resit/resubmissionopportunity

Penalty for latesubmission

Notes

Problems set inworkshops

12 x 2hours

2 30 Subsumed by resitexamination

As universitypolicy

This work is notmarked anonymously

Page 34: ,'.'' ,'0''sdb/ModSpecs/2012/PHYSmod...Lec 15&16 Wk 9 Damped and Forced Harmonic Oscillator Resonance PC 8 Wk 9 Demonstration Experiment, Prediction and Writeup Lec 17&18 Wk 10 Gravitation

MODULE SPECIFICATION

The information contained in this module specification was correct at the time of publication but may be subject tochange, either during the session because of unforeseen circumstances, or following review of the module at the end ofthe session. Queries about the module should be directed to the member of staff with responsibility for the module.

1. Module Title WORKING WITH PHYSICS II

2. Module Code PHYS205

3. Year 201213

4. OriginatingDepartment

Physics

5. Faculty Fac of Science & Engineering

6. Semester Whole Session

7. Credit Level Level Two

8. Credit Value 15

9. External Examiner Physics External Examiner

10. Member of staff withresponsibility for themodule

Dr AJ Boston Physics [email protected]

11. Module Moderator Dr JH Vossebeld Physics [email protected]

12. Other ContributingDepartments

13. Other Staff Teachingon this Module

14. Board of Studies Physics

15. Mode of Delivery Lectures/Classes

16. Location Main Liverpool City Campus

Lectures Seminars Tutorials Lab/Practicals Fieldwork/Placement Other TOTAL

17. ContactHours

17= 17 x 1lectures/week

34= 17 x 2-hourworkshops/computingclasses

51

18. Non-contact hours 9919. TOTAL HOURS 150

Lectures Seminars Tutorials Lab/Practicals Fieldwork/Placement Other

20. Timetable(if known)

1 1hr (singlelecture) sloteach week for17 weeks

Computingproblem classes 12hr slot eachweek (weeks 1 -12)

Problem Classes: 12hr slot each week ona later day than thelectures, in anappropriate learningenvironment (Weeks 1- 5 semester 2)

21. Pre-requisites before taking this module (other modules and/or general educational/academic requirements):

Physics A Level (or equivalent)

22. Modules for which this module is a pre-requisite:

None

23. Co-requisite modules:

None

24. Linked Modules:

25. Programme(s) (including Year of Study) to which this module is available on a mandatory basis:

26. Programme(s) (including Year of Study) to which this module is available on a required basis:

F300 (2) F303 (2) F352 (2) F350 (2) F3F5 (2) F521 (1) F390 (2)

27. Programme(s) (including Year of Study) to which this module is available on an optional basis:

MODULE DESCRIPTION

28. Aims

To develop essential research skillsTo use programming techniques to solve problems in Physics, Nuclear Physics, Astrophysics and/ormeduical applciations of physics.To develop skills in modelling the solution to a problemTo give students experience iof working in small groups to solve a problemTo give students further experience of communicating their results using computer packages

29. Learning Outcomes

At the end of the module the student should have:

Mastered a basic set of rersearch skillsKnowledge of programming techniques in MatlabThe ability to solve problems using a computer programUnderstand the need to plan, properly structure and test computer programsSet up a model to solve a simple problemExperience of working in a small groupImproved communication skills using computer packages (both written, Oral and Poster)

30. Teaching and Learning Strategies

The course will consist of a combination of lectures, computer sessions and problems classes. The lectures aredesigned to present students with the basics of research skills and equip the students to write and solveproblems using an computer language.

The problems and computer classes give the students the opportunity to investigate further the conceptsdiscussed in the lectures in an environment in which group work is encouraged and expert supervision isavailable. The assessment will contain significant elements of peer marking. The intellectual focus is on transferof knowledge to new situations and application of physical insights to new problems.

31. Syllabus

Weeks 1 - 7 The following is delivered through lectures and computing classes.A basic introduction to programming with Matlab using a simple program thatoutputs text and does simple calculations. This will be used to evaluate simpleformulae.Use of more complex programming methods including parameter lists and loops;use of numerical integration and more complex mathametical expressionsUse of arrays, plotting in MatlabUse of random numbers; generation of histograms and GaussiansApplications of these techniques to problems through the use of sample programs

Weeks 8 - 12 An introduction to Monte Carlo techniques (lectures)The use of Monte Carlo techniques to solve problems using Matlab (computingsessions).The problems will link be focused towards the Physics, Nuclear Physics,Astrophysics and Medical Physics programmes.Write up of computing project report.

Weeks 13 - 17An introduction to basic research skills utilising lectures and problem classes.

Page 35: ,'.'' ,'0''sdb/ModSpecs/2012/PHYSmod...Lec 15&16 Wk 9 Damped and Forced Harmonic Oscillator Resonance PC 8 Wk 9 Demonstration Experiment, Prediction and Writeup Lec 17&18 Wk 10 Gravitation

An introduction to basic research skills utilising lectures and problem classes.There will be joint sessions for Physics, Physics with Medical applications,Physics with Nuclear Science and Astrophysics.In introduction to professional web resources for physicistsCases studies looking at the critical analysis of experimentally derived data

Weeks 18 - 24 Oral and Poster presentation on generic topic related to chosen programme.For Medical Physics students "Medical applications of X-rays", "Principles ofSPECT and its applications for brain imaging"Written report selected from titles relating to Physics from any of the 4cornerstone modules. Examples for Astrophysics students include "The physics of3C273", "The Physics of "TS Ophiuchi"

32. Recommended Texts

"Programming with JAVA", John R. Hubbard.

ASSESSMENT

33. EXAM Duration Timing(Semester)

% of finalmark

Resit/resubmissionopportunity

Penalty for latesubmission

Notes

34. CONTINUOUS Duration Timing

(Semester)% of finalmark

Resit/resubmissionopportunity

Penalty for latesubmission

Notes

Basic research skills 5 x 2hours

2 20 None: Exemptionapproved31/8/2011

As universitypolicy

Problems set incomputing sessions

12 x 2hours

1 30 None: Exemptionapproved31/8/2011

As universitypolicy

Computing projectreport

1 20 None: Exemptionapproved31/8/2011

As universitypolicy

Oral and posterpresentation

2 20 None: Exemptionapproved31/8/2011

As universitypolicy

This work is notmarked anonymously

Written essay report 2 10 None: Exemptionapproved31/8/2011

As universitypolicy

MODULE SPECIFICATION

The information contained in this module specification was correct at the time of publication but may be subject tochange, either during the session because of unforeseen circumstances, or following review of the module at the end ofthe session. Queries about the module should be directed to the member of staff with responsibility for the module.

1. Module Title PRACTICAL PHYSICS II

2. Module Code PHYS206

3. Year 201213

4. OriginatingDepartment

Physics

5. Faculty Fac of Science & Engineering

6. Semester Whole Session

7. Credit Level Level Two

8. Credit Value 15

9. External Examiner Physics External Examiner

10. Member of staff withresponsibility for themodule

Dr S Burdin Physics [email protected]

11. Module Moderator Dr DS Martin Physics [email protected]

12. Other ContributingDepartments

13. Other Staff Teachingon this Module

14. Board of Studies Physics

15. Mode of Delivery Lectures/Practical

16. Location Main Liverpool City Campus

Lectures Seminars Tutorials Lab/Practicals Fieldwork/Placement Other TOTAL

17. ContactHours

12= 12 x 1hlectures in the2nd semester

102= 12 x 6-hour practicals inthe 1st semester and 10 x3-hour practicals in the2nd semester

3010 x 2h +2 x 5hprojectwork inthe 2ndsemester

144

18. Non-contact hours 619. TOTAL HOURS 150

Lectures Seminars Tutorials Lab/Practicals Fieldwork/Placement Other

20. Timetable(if known)

None in theS1 and 12lectures in S2(1 hourlecture aweek)

Practicals: 6 hours/week in S1; 3h/week for 5 weeks (alternating) inclass with ELVIS2+ stations and 3h/week for 5 weeks in computerclass (electronics simulation) for 5weeks (alternating) in S2

Projectwork(2h/weekx 10weeks +5h/weekx 2weeks)in aclasswithELVIS2+stations

21. Pre-requisites before taking this module (other modules and/or general educational/academic requirements):

Page 36: ,'.'' ,'0''sdb/ModSpecs/2012/PHYSmod...Lec 15&16 Wk 9 Damped and Forced Harmonic Oscillator Resonance PC 8 Wk 9 Demonstration Experiment, Prediction and Writeup Lec 17&18 Wk 10 Gravitation

PHYS106

22. Modules for which this module is a pre-requisite:

23. Co-requisite modules:

24. Linked Modules:

25. Programme(s) (including Year of Study) to which this module is available on a mandatory basis:

26. Programme(s) (including Year of Study) to which this module is available on a required basis:

F300 (2) F303 (2) F352 (2) F350 (2) F3F5 (2) F521 (2) F390 (2)

27. Programme(s) (including Year of Study) to which this module is available on an optional basis:

MODULE DESCRIPTION

28. Aims

Setting up and calibrating equipmentTaking reliable and reproducible dataCalculating experimental results and their associated errorsUsing computer software for simulation and data analysisWriting a coherent account of the experimental procedure and conclusionsUnderstanding physics in depth by performing specific experimentsDeveloping practical and technical skills required for electronics experimentation

29. Learning Outcomes

At the end of the module the student should have:

Improved practical skills and experience.A detailed understanding of the fundamental physics behind the experiments.Increased confidence in setting up and calibrating equipment.Familiarity with IT package for calculating, displaying and presenting results.Enhanced ability to plan, execute and report the results of an investigation.The skills to assemble, test and debug electronic circuits involving the use of both passive and activeelectronic components.

30. Teaching and Learning Strategies

The course will consist of a combination of lectures and practicals. The practicals in the semester 1 will berelated to the following modules: Electromagnetism, Condensed Matter, Quantum and Atomic Physics, Particleand Nuclear Physics. The electronics practicals in the semester 2 will be based on the corresponding lectures.

The details will be described in the Department of Physics Undergraduate Handbook and Guide to Second YearPractical Laboratories.

31. Syllabus

Further training in experimental techniques and data analysis.Making measurements, analysing data and drawing conclusions from a variety ofexperiments in physics appropriate to Year 2 of study.

Signals and components: Sinusoidal and pulse signals, voltage and currentsources, resistive and reactive components.Linear circuit analysis: D.C. circuit analysis; A.C. analysis using complexnumbers.Non-linear devices: diods, transistors, operational amplifiers.Digital circuits and logic systems.Sequential logic: Bistable systems - flip-flops with synchronous and asynchronousoperation; Flip-flops as memory elements - binary counters and shift registers.Interfaces: Digital to analogue (DAC) and analogue to digital (ADC) conversion -

principles; DAC with weighted resistor network; Counter ADC, integrator ADC,flash ADC.

Practical Syllabus

There are six experiments in the 1st semester, five experiments and project work in the2nd semester.

32. Recommended Texts

None. Laboratory manuals are provided

ASSESSMENT

33. EXAM Duration Timing(Semester)

% of finalmark

Resit/resubmissionopportunity

Penalty for latesubmission

Notes

34. CONTINUOUS Duration Timing

(Semester)% of finalmark

Resit/resubmissionopportunity

Penalty for latesubmission

Notes

Seven generalexperiments

1 50 None: Exemptionapproved31/8/2011

As universitypolicy

This work is notmarked anonymously

Five experiments onelectronics

2 25 None: Exemptionapproved31/8/2011

As universitypolicy

This work is notmarked anonymously

Project work 2 25 None: Exemptionapproved31/8/2011

As universitypolicy

This work is notmarked anonymously

Page 37: ,'.'' ,'0''sdb/ModSpecs/2012/PHYSmod...Lec 15&16 Wk 9 Damped and Forced Harmonic Oscillator Resonance PC 8 Wk 9 Demonstration Experiment, Prediction and Writeup Lec 17&18 Wk 10 Gravitation

MODULE SPECIFICATION

The information contained in this module specification was correct at the time of publication but may be subject tochange, either during the session because of unforeseen circumstances, or following review of the module at the end ofthe session. Queries about the module should be directed to the member of staff with responsibility for the module.

1. Module Title MATHEMATICS FOR PHYSICISTS III

2. Module Code PHYS207

3. Year 201213

4. OriginatingDepartment

Physics

5. Faculty Fac of Science & Engineering

6. Semester First Semester

7. Credit Level Level Two

8. Credit Value 15

9. External Examiner Physics External Examiner

10. Member of staff withresponsibility for themodule

Prof RN McGrath Physics [email protected]

11. Module Moderator Dr J Kretzschmar Physics [email protected]

12. Other ContributingDepartments

Mathematical Sciences

13. Other Staff Teachingon this Module

Dr TM Mohaupt Mathematical Sciences [email protected]

14. Board of Studies Physics

15. Mode of Delivery Lectures/Classes

16. Location Main Liverpool City Campus

Lectures Seminars Tutorials Lab/Practicals Fieldwork/Placement Other TOTAL

17. ContactHours

24= 12 x 2lectures/week

24= 12 x 2-hourworkshops

48

18. Non-contact hours 10219. TOTAL HOURS 150

Lectures Seminars Tutorials Lab/Practicals Fieldwork/Placement Other

20. Timetable(if known)

1 2hr (doublelecture) slot eachweek

Problem Classes: 1 2hrslot each week on a laterday than the lectures, inan appropriate learningenvironment

21. Pre-requisites before taking this module (other modules and/or general educational/academic requirements):

PHYS107 and PHYS108 or equivalent

22. Modules for which this module is a pre-requisite:

23. Co-requisite modules:

24. Linked Modules:

25. Programme(s) (including Year of Study) to which this module is available on a mandatory basis:

26. Programme(s) (including Year of Study) to which this module is available on a required basis:

F300 (2) F303 (2) F352 (2) F350 (2) F3F5 (2) F521 (2) F390 (2)

27. Programme(s) (including Year of Study) to which this module is available on an optional basis:

MODULE DESCRIPTION

28. Aims

To re-inforce students' prior knowledge of mathematical techniquesTo introduce new mathematical techniques for physics modulesTo enhance students' problem-solving abilities through structured application of these techniques inphysics

29. Learning Outcomes

At the end of the module the student should be able to:

Have knowledge of a range of mathematical techniques necessary for physics and astrophysicsprogrammesBe able to apply these mathematical techniques in a range of physics and astrophysics programmes

30. Teaching and Learning Strategies

The course will consist of a combination of lectures and problems classes. The lectures are designed to presentstudents with important concepts of mathematics and illustrate these with reference to simple physical systems.

The problems classes give the students the opportunity to investigate further the concepts discussed in thelectures in an environment in which group work is encouraged and expert supervision is available. Theassessment will contain elements of peer marking.

31. Syllabus

Overview

Determinants and matricesDifferentiation, expansion and approximationIntegration, summing and averagingReview of complex numbers and vectorsVector calculus 1: differentiating vectorsVector calculus 2: integrating vectors

32. Recommended Texts

"Tinker and Lambourne" Further Mathematics for the physical sciences (or equivalent)

ASSESSMENT

33. EXAM Duration Timing(Semester)

% of finalmark

Resit/resubmissionopportunity

Penalty for latesubmission

Notes

Written examination 1.5 hours 1 60 August34. CONTINUOUS Duration Timing

(Semester)% of finalmark

Resit/resubmissionopportunity

Penalty for latesubmission

Notes

Problems set inworkshops

12 x 2hours

1 40 Subsumed by resitexamination

As universitypolicy

This work is notmarked anonymously

Page 38: ,'.'' ,'0''sdb/ModSpecs/2012/PHYSmod...Lec 15&16 Wk 9 Damped and Forced Harmonic Oscillator Resonance PC 8 Wk 9 Demonstration Experiment, Prediction and Writeup Lec 17&18 Wk 10 Gravitation

MODULE SPECIFICATION

The information contained in this module specification was correct at the time of publication but may be subject tochange, either during the session because of unforeseen circumstances, or following review of the module at the end ofthe session. Queries about the module should be directed to the member of staff with responsibility for the module.

1. Module Title MATHEMATICS FOR PHYSICISTS IV

2. Module Code PHYS208

3. Year 201213

4. OriginatingDepartment

Physics

5. Faculty Fac of Science & Engineering

6. Semester Second Semester

7. Credit Level Level Two

8. Credit Value 15

9. External Examiner Physics External Examiner

10. Member of staff withresponsibility for themodule

Dr J Kretzschmar Physics [email protected]

11. Module Moderator Prof TJ Greenshaw Physics [email protected]

12. Other ContributingDepartments

Mathematical Sciences

13. Other Staff Teachingon this Module

Dr T Moore Physics [email protected]

14. Board of Studies Physics

15. Mode of Delivery Lectures/Classes

16. Location Main Liverpool City Campus

Lectures Seminars Tutorials Lab/Practicals Fieldwork/Placement Other TOTAL

17. ContactHours

24= 12 x 2lectures/week

24= 12 x 2-hourworkshops

48

18. Non-contact hours 10219. TOTAL HOURS 150

Lectures Seminars Tutorials Lab/Practicals Fieldwork/Placement Other

20. Timetable(if known)

1 2hr (doublelecture) sloteach week

Problem Classes: 1 2hr slot eachweek on a later day than thelectures, in an appropriatelearning environment

21. Pre-requisites before taking this module (other modules and/or general educational/academic requirements):

PHYS107, PHYS108, PHYS207

22. Modules for which this module is a pre-requisite:

23. Co-requisite modules:

24. Linked Modules:

25. Programme(s) (including Year of Study) to which this module is available on a mandatory basis:

26. Programme(s) (including Year of Study) to which this module is available on a required basis:

F300 (2) F303 (2) F352 (2) F350 (2) F3F5 (2) F521 (2) F390 (2)

27. Programme(s) (including Year of Study) to which this module is available on an optional basis:

MODULE DESCRIPTION

28. Aims

To re-inforce students' prior knowledge of mathematical techniquesTo introduce new mathematical techniques for physics modulesTo enhance students' problem-solving abilities through structured application of these techniques inphysics

29. Learning Outcomes

At the end of the module the student should be able to:

Have knowledge of a range of advanced mathematical techniques necessary for physics and astrophysicsprogrammesBe able to apply these mathematical techniques in a range of physics and astrophysics programmes

30. Teaching and Learning Strategies

The course will consist of a combination of lectures and problems classes. The lectures are designed to presentstudents with advanced concepts of mathematics and illustrate these with reference to physics applications.

The problems classes give the students the opportunity to investigate further the concepts discussed in thelectures in an environment in which group work is encouraged and expert supervision is available. Theassessment will contain elements of peer marking.

31. Syllabus

Overview

Differential equations of first and second orderPartial differential equationsGroups, vector spaces, metricsSpecial relativity, four vectors and transformationsAdvanced statistical methods

32. Recommended Texts

"Tinker and Lambourne": Further Mathematics for the physical sciences (or equivalent)

ASSESSMENT

33. EXAM Duration Timing(Semester)

% of finalmark

Resit/resubmissionopportunity

Penalty for latesubmission

Notes

Written examination 1.5 hours 2 60 August34. CONTINUOUS Duration Timing

(Semester)% of finalmark

Resit/resubmissionopportunity

Penalty for latesubmission

Notes

Problems set inworkshops

12 x 2hours

2 40 Subsumed by resitexamination

As universitypolicy

This work is notmarked anonymously

Page 39: ,'.'' ,'0''sdb/ModSpecs/2012/PHYSmod...Lec 15&16 Wk 9 Damped and Forced Harmonic Oscillator Resonance PC 8 Wk 9 Demonstration Experiment, Prediction and Writeup Lec 17&18 Wk 10 Gravitation

MODULE SPECIFICATION

The information contained in this module specification was correct at the time of publication but may be subject tochange, either during the session because of unforeseen circumstances, or following review of the module at the end ofthe session. Queries about the module should be directed to the member of staff with responsibility for the module.

1. Module Title PRACTICAL ASTROPHYSICS

2. Module Code PHYS216

3. Year 201213

4. OriginatingDepartment

Physics

5. Faculty Fac of Science & Engineering

6. Semester Whole Session

7. Credit Level Level Two

8. Credit Value 15

9. External Examiner Astrophysics External Examiner

10. Member of staff withresponsibility for themodule

Dr MJ Darnley Physics [email protected]

11. Module Moderator Dr C Simpson Physics [email protected]

12. Other ContributingDepartments

13. Other Staff Teachingon this Module

14. Board of Studies Physics

15. Mode of Delivery Lectures/Practical

16. Location Main Liverpool City Campus

Lectures Seminars Tutorials Lab/Practicals Fieldwork/Placement Other TOTAL

17. ContactHours

125x 2-hourslectures/week in thefirst five weeks ofthe first semester.1x 2-hour revisionlecture in the 11thweek of the secondsemester

10818x 6-hourpracticals.These takeplace in the lastsix weeks ofsemester 1 andthe whole ofsemester 2

105x 2-hoursproblemclasses/weekin the firstfive weeks ofthe firstsemester

130

18. Non-contact hours 2019. TOTAL HOURS 150

Lectures Seminars Tutorials Lab/Practicals Fieldwork/Placement Other

20. Timetable(if known)

10 Lectures in the first fiveweeks of the first semester(2x1hr lectures a week). Tworevision lectures (2x1hr) in the11th week of the secondsemester

Practicals: 6hreach week insecond half ofthe 1stsemester andthe entire 2ndsemester.

10ProblemClassesin the firstfiveweeks ofthe firstsemester(2x1hrclassesperweek).None inthe 2nd

semester.

21. Pre-requisites before taking this module (other modules and/or general educational/academic requirements):

PHYS106

22. Modules for which this module is a pre-requisite:

PHYS394

23. Co-requisite modules:

PHYS205

24. Linked Modules:

25. Programme(s) (including Year of Study) to which this module is available on a mandatory basis:

26. Programme(s) (including Year of Study) to which this module is available on a required basis:

F3F5 (2) F521 (2)

27. Programme(s) (including Year of Study) to which this module is available on an optional basis:

MODULE DESCRIPTION

28. Aims

Setting up and calibrating equipmentBecome familiar with equipment used in later modulesTaking reliable and reproducible dataDevelop understanding of various techniques of data gathering and analysis in modern astrophysicsCalculating experimental results and their associated uncertaintiesUsing computer software, including specific astrophysical software, to analyse dataWriting a coherent account of the experimental procedure and conclusionsUnderstanding physics in depth by performing specific experimentsDeveloping practical, technical and computing skills required for later modules

29. Learning Outcomes

At the end of the module the student should have:

Improved practical skills and experience.A detailed understanding of the fundamental physics and/or astrophysics behind the experiments.Increased confidence in setting up and calibrating equipment.Familiarity with IT package for calculating, displaying and presenting results.Familiarity with subject specfic astrophysics data analysis software.Enhanced ability to plan, execute and report the results of an investigation.Knowledge of the methods employed in the detection and analysis of light at optical wavelengths fromastrophysical sources.A clear understanding of the methods employed in astronomical photometry and spectroscopy.Experience of the acquisition, reduction and analysis of astronomical data.

30. Teaching and Learning Strategies

This course will consist of a combination of lectures, problem classes and practicals.

The practicals will be a combination of optics and astrophysics equipment based practicals along with a numberof computer/data based astrophysics experiments.

The lectures and associated problem classes, will address the acquisition, reduction and analysis of opticalastrophysicsal data.

The full details will be described in the Department of Physics Undergraduate Handbook and the guide to thesecond year Astrophysics Practicals.

Page 40: ,'.'' ,'0''sdb/ModSpecs/2012/PHYSmod...Lec 15&16 Wk 9 Damped and Forced Harmonic Oscillator Resonance PC 8 Wk 9 Demonstration Experiment, Prediction and Writeup Lec 17&18 Wk 10 Gravitation

31. Syllabus

Laboratory The laboratory-based section of the module will consist of nine practical experiments inthe general areas of optics and the detection and analysis of optical frequency light, forexample:

The characteristics of an astronomical CCD camera.Pre-processing astronomical imaging and spectroscopic data.The photometric and spectroscopic analysis of data.Astrophysical distance determination.The emission spectra of atomic hydrogen and helium.

Lecture / Prob Class The lecture component will concentrate on positional astronomy and astronomicalphotometry, including the following areas:

Signal to noise calculations.Detectors.Filter systems.Relative and absolute photometry.Atmospheric effects.Photometric standards.Coordinate transformations.

The lectures will be complemented by a number of problem classes which will be used tocomplete problems based on the lecture topics. A number of these problems will counttowards the assessment.

32. Recommended Texts

Detailed laboratory manuals and lecture notes are provided. "Astronomy methods" by H Bradt, CambridgeUniversity Press

ASSESSMENT

33. EXAM Duration Timing(Semester)

% of finalmark

Resit/resubmissionopportunity

Penalty for latesubmission

Notes

34. CONTINUOUS Duration Timing

(Semester)% of finalmark

Resit/resubmissionopportunity

Penalty for latesubmission

Notes

Assessed problems 5xproblemssets

1 15 None: Exemptionapproved31/8/2011

As universitypolicy

This work is notmarked anonymously

Laboratory practicalwork

1 and 2 75 None: Exemptionapproved31/8/2011

As universitypolicy

This work is notmarked anonymously

Observational skillsexercise

1.5 hours 2 10 Summer vacation N/A asassessment istimetabled

This will take place atthe end of S2

MODULE SPECIFICATION

The information contained in this module specification was correct at the time of publication but may be subject tochange, either during the session because of unforeseen circumstances, or following review of the module at the end ofthe session. Queries about the module should be directed to the member of staff with responsibility for the module.

1. Module Title VISUAL OPTICS II

2. Module Code PHYS237

3. Year 201213

4. OriginatingDepartment

Physics

5. Faculty Fac of Science & Engineering

6. Semester Second Semester

7. Credit Level Level Two

8. Credit Value 7.5

9. External Examiner Physics External Examiner

10. Member of staff withresponsibility for themodule

Prof TJV Bowcock Physics [email protected]

11. Module Moderator Prof P Allport Physics [email protected]

12. Other ContributingDepartments

School of Health Sciences

13. Other Staff Teachingon this Module

Dr HL Vaughan Central Teaching Laboratory [email protected] HP Orton School of Health Sciences [email protected]

14. Board of Studies Physics Board of Studies

15. Mode of Delivery Lectures/Laboratory

16. Location Main Liverpool City Campus

Lectures Seminars Tutorials Lab/Practicals Fieldwork/Placement Other TOTAL

17. ContactHours

12 6 15 33

18. Non-contact hours 4219. TOTAL HOURS 75

Lectures Seminars Tutorials Lab/Practicals Fieldwork/Placement Other

20. Timetable(if known)

21. Pre-requisites before taking this module (other modules and/or general educational/academic requirements):

PHYS137

22. Modules for which this module is a pre-requisite:

"Clinical Visual Optics" and "Vision Science and Opthalmology" modules in Year 3

23. Co-requisite modules:

None

24. Linked Modules:

25. Programme(s) (including Year of Study) to which this module is available on a mandatory basis:

Page 41: ,'.'' ,'0''sdb/ModSpecs/2012/PHYSmod...Lec 15&16 Wk 9 Damped and Forced Harmonic Oscillator Resonance PC 8 Wk 9 Demonstration Experiment, Prediction and Writeup Lec 17&18 Wk 10 Gravitation

B520 (2)

26. Programme(s) (including Year of Study) to which this module is available on a required basis:

27. Programme(s) (including Year of Study) to which this module is available on an optional basis:

MODULE DESCRIPTION

28. Aims

To provide the student with a further basic knowledge of optics including the necessary mathematical andtheoretical skillsTo provide the student with opportunities to apply knowledge gainedTo provide the student with practical experience of physical optics, the eye as a thick lens, lensaberrations and instrumental optics to illustrate and support lecture materialTo provide the student with the appropriate preparation for the Clinical Visual Optics module in Year 3

29. Learning Outcomes

At the end of this module the student should be able to:

Illustrate the fundamental phenomena of physical optics; the properties of light, the interaction of light withmatter, light sources and colourIllustrate the origin of aberrations and more specifically, spherical and chromatic aberration aberrationsand astigmatismInterpret the principles of optical imaging systemsApply the optical principles to instruments used in the ophthalmological assessment of patients

30. Teaching and Learning Strategies

The module will be delivered by way of a series of lectures with problem-solving sessions (tutorials within thePhysics Department and Division of Orthoptics) and computer-assisted learning opportunities. Formativeassessments will be offered to students in order to monitor their own understanding and performance. Fivelaboratory practicals lasting three hours will give the students the opertunity to test the theories being taught inthe lectures and gain practice in making accurate measurements of optical systems and recording the results.

31. Syllabus

1 Introductory Lecture (1 hour)

2-5 Physical Optics (4 hours)

Properties of light

Electromagnetic spectrum - optical radiation, colourWave theory of light and consequences - interference, diffraction and polarisationand orthoptc clinical application of polarisation.

Interaction of light with matter

Refection at irregular surfacesAbsorption, transmission and scattering

Light Sources

Continuous spectra and spectrum linesFiltersLasers

Colour

Spectral sensitivity of the eye and the addition of colours

6-8 Lens Aberrations (3 hours)

Aberrations

Monochromatic aberrations and paraxial aberrations

Spherical Aberrations

Sperical Aberrations and correction of spherical aberration in a lens and coma

Aberrations and Astigmatism

Tangential and sagittal planes and reducing astigmatismCylindrical and toric lensesSturm conoid and astigmatism in the eyeCurvature of field and distortion

Chromatic Aberration

Dispersive indexLaboratory assessment of chromatic aberrationsAchromatic doubletChromatic aberration in the eye

Reducing lens aberrations in spectacle lenses

9-12 Instrumental Optics (4 hours)

General imaging systems

PinholesTelescopes - resolution, Rayleigh criterion, Galilean (and Rayleigh)Microscopes - principles of compoundEyepieces - Huygens (and Ramsden)Practical considerations for optical instruments - stops, aperture stop, chief rayand field stop

Optical Systems

Instuments for examining the anterior eye - slit-lamp biomicroscope, operatingmicroscope, tonometer (keratoscope and keratometer)Instruments for examining posterior eye - direct opthalmoscope, indirectopthalmoscope and modification (findus camera)Instruments for refraction - retinoscope, duochrome test, cross cylinderInstruments for measuring lenses - focimeter

Lab 1 Measurement of Dispersion using a Spectrometer

Lab 2 Measurement of the transmisson curves of coloured filters

Lab 3 Mixing coloured light and measuring spherical aberations

Lab 4 Measuring chromatic aberations

Lab 5 Building a microscope and telescope from component lenses

32. Recommended Texts

Clinical Optics. Elkington AR, Frank HJ, Greaney MJ (1999). Blackwell Science. Oxford, Third Edition. ISBN:0632049898

Duke Elder's Practice of Refraction (1978), Revised by David Abrams. Churchill Livingstone, Ninth Edition.ISBN: 0443014787 (Note: Out of print but available in the library)

Physics for Opthalmologists. Edited by Coster DJ. Churchill Livingstone, First Edition. ISBN: 0443049351

ASSESSMENT

33. EXAM Duration Timing(Semester)

% of finalmark

Resit/resubmissionopportunity

Penalty for latesubmission

Notes

Written Examination 1.5 hrs Semester2

70 August

34. CONTINUOUS Duration Timing(Semester)

% of finalmark

Resit/resubmissionopportunity

Penalty for latesubmission

Notes

Page 42: ,'.'' ,'0''sdb/ModSpecs/2012/PHYSmod...Lec 15&16 Wk 9 Damped and Forced Harmonic Oscillator Resonance PC 8 Wk 9 Demonstration Experiment, Prediction and Writeup Lec 17&18 Wk 10 Gravitation

Laboratory Reports 2 30 Summer vacation As universitypolicy

This work is notmarked anonymously MODULE SPECIFICATION

The information contained in this module specification was correct at the time of publication but may be subject tochange, either during the session because of unforeseen circumstances, or following review of the module at the end ofthe session. Queries about the module should be directed to the member of staff with responsibility for the module.

1. Module Title ACCELERATORS AND RADIOISOTOPES IN MEDICINE

2. Module Code PHYS246

3. Year 201213

4. OriginatingDepartment

Physics

5. Faculty Fac of Science & Engineering

6. Semester Second Semester

7. Credit Level Level Two

8. Credit Value 15

9. External Examiner Physics External Examiner

10. Member of staff withresponsibility for themodule

Prof RD Page Physics [email protected]

11. Module Moderator Dr HC Boston Physics [email protected]

12. Other ContributingDepartments

13. Other Staff Teachingon this Module

14. Board of Studies Physics

15. Mode of Delivery Lectures/Workshops

16. Location Main Liverpool City Campus

Lectures Seminars Tutorials Lab/Practicals Fieldwork/Placement Other TOTAL

17. ContactHours

24 126 x 2-hour workshops

36

18. Non-contact hours 11419. TOTAL HOURS 150

Lectures Seminars Tutorials Lab/Practicals Fieldwork/Placement Other

20. Timetable(if known)

21. Pre-requisites before taking this module (other modules and/or general educational/academic requirements):

None

22. Modules for which this module is a pre-requisite:

None

23. Co-requisite modules:

None

24. Linked Modules:

25. Programme(s) (including Year of Study) to which this module is available on a mandatory basis:

26. Programme(s) (including Year of Study) to which this module is available on a required basis:

Page 43: ,'.'' ,'0''sdb/ModSpecs/2012/PHYSmod...Lec 15&16 Wk 9 Damped and Forced Harmonic Oscillator Resonance PC 8 Wk 9 Demonstration Experiment, Prediction and Writeup Lec 17&18 Wk 10 Gravitation

Programme(s) (including Year of Study) to which this module is available on a required basis:

F390 (2) F350 (2)

27. Programme(s) (including Year of Study) to which this module is available on an optional basis:

MODULE DESCRIPTION

28. Aims

To introduce the students to ionising and non ionising radiation including its origins and production.To introduce the various ways in which radiation interacts with materials.To introduce the different accelerators and isotopes used in medicine and to give examples of their use.

29. Learning Outcomes

At the end of the module the student should have:

A basic knowledge of the origins of radiation and its properties.An understanding of ways in which radiation interacts with materials.An understanding of how accelerators operate and how isotopes are produced.Knowledge of applications of the use of accelerators and isotopes in medicine.

30. Teaching and Learning Strategies

See Department of Physics Student Handbook.

31. Syllabus

Origins and properties of radiation:

Types of origins and effects of ionising and non ionising radiation. Atomicand nuclear energy levels, radiation of atoms and nuclei.

Interaction of radiation with materials:

Photoelectric and Compton effects, pair production. Attenuation andabsorption coefficients. Bethe-Bloch equation for charged particles, linearenergy transfer, stopping power and range, Bragg curve. Interaction ofmicrowaves and lasers with materials. Effects of radiation on biologicalsystems. Absorbed, equivalent and effective dose.

Accelerators and isotopes:

Acceleration of charged particles, types of accelerators used: cyclotrons,linacs and synchrotrons. Beam species and energies used. Production ofradioisotopes, properties of some common medical isotopes. Microwaves,basic properties and production.

Examples of uses:

Selected examples of uses of accelerators and isotopes in medicalapplications, such as PET, SPECT, X-ray imaging, brachytherapy, IMRTand heavy ion radiotherapy.

32. Recommended Texts

"Nuclear Physics: Principles & Applications" by John Lilley published by Wiley

ASSESSMENT

33. EXAM Duration Timing(Semester)

% of finalmark

Resit/resubmissionopportunity

Penalty for latesubmission

Notes

Written examination 3 hours 2 100 August34. CONTINUOUS Duration Timing

(Semester)% of finalmark

Resit/resubmissionopportunity

Penalty for latesubmission

Notes

Page 44: ,'.'' ,'0''sdb/ModSpecs/2012/PHYSmod...Lec 15&16 Wk 9 Damped and Forced Harmonic Oscillator Resonance PC 8 Wk 9 Demonstration Experiment, Prediction and Writeup Lec 17&18 Wk 10 Gravitation

MODULE SPECIFICATION

The information contained in this module specification was correct at the time of publication but may be subject tochange, either during the session because of unforeseen circumstances, or following review of the module at the end ofthe session. Queries about the module should be directed to the member of staff with responsibility for the module.

1. Module Title PHYSICS FOR NEW TECHNOLOGY PROJECT

2. Module Code PHYS360

3. Year 201213

4. OriginatingDepartment

Physics

5. Faculty Fac of Science & Engineering

6. Semester Whole Session

7. Credit Level Level Three

8. Credit Value 30

9. External Examiner Physics External Examiner

10. Member of staff withresponsibility for themodule

Prof CA Lucas Physics [email protected]

11. Module Moderator Dr U Klein Physics [email protected]

12. Other ContributingDepartments

13. Other Staff Teachingon this Module

Dr SD Barrett Physics [email protected]

14. Board of Studies Physics

15. Mode of Delivery Practicals

16. Location Main Liverpool City Campus

Lectures Seminars Tutorials Lab/Practicals Fieldwork/Placement Other TOTAL

17. ContactHours

216 216

18. Non-contact hours 8419. TOTAL HOURS 300

Lectures Seminars Tutorials Lab/Practicals Fieldwork/Placement Other

20. Timetable(if known)

21. Pre-requisites before taking this module (other modules and/or general educational/academic requirements):

PHYS111 or equivalent

22. Modules for which this module is a pre-requisite:

None

23. Co-requisite modules:

None

24. Linked Modules:

25. Programme(s) (including Year of Study) to which this module is available on a mandatory basis:

26. Programme(s) (including Year of Study) to which this module is available on a required basis:

Programme(s) (including Year of Study) to which this module is available on a required basis:

F352 (3)

27. Programme(s) (including Year of Study) to which this module is available on an optional basis:

MODULE DESCRIPTION

28. Aims

To give the student the following:

Experience of working independently on an original problem.An opportunity to conceive, plan, propose and execute a project involving computer control of a system oftransducers.An opportunity to display the quality of their work.An opportunity to display qualities such as initiative and ingenuity.Experience of report writing, displaying high standards of composition and production.An opportunity to display communication skills.

29. Learning Outcomes

At the end of the module,the student should have:

Experience of participation in planning all aspects of the work.Experience researching literature and other sources of relevant information.Improved skills and initiative in carrying out investigations.Improved ability to organise and manage time.A working knowledge of the hardware and software required to allow computers to communicate withother pieces of equipment.An ability to select and use hardware and software to solve a particular problem.Improved skills in report writing.Improved skills in preparing and delivering oral presentations

30. Teaching and Learning Strategies

To achieve the aims and learning outcomes of the module, the student is provided with detailed instructions onthe programming language to be used and on the operation of the various electronic interface modules available.While the student is encouraged to use their own initiative in conceiving and planning the project, closesupervision is given throughout to ensure that the desired outcome is achieved.

31. Syllabus

Some introductory programming exercises are used to allow the student to becomefamiliar with the operation of the MicroLink data acquisition system. Some interfacemodules (such as analogue-to-digital converters, switches, counters, etc) are usedindividually and in combination to demonstrate how control systems can be constructed.

In the middle of Semester 1, after having gained some experience of the capabilities ofthe various modules in the MicroLink system, the student prepares a written proposal fora project which will occupy the remainder of the year. Details of the project aims will behanded in at the end of the semester 1.

The student will keep a day by day diary showing the work done on the project and itsprogress. This will be handed in with the final report.

The written project report will be handed in before the end of Semester 2. The oralpresentation (or, with the approval of the Module Organiser, a poster presentation) willbe given in one of the scheduled sessions.

32. Recommended Texts

None

ASSESSMENT

33. EXAM Duration Timing(Semester)

% of finalmark

Resit/resubmissionopportunity

Penalty for latesubmission

Notes

Page 45: ,'.'' ,'0''sdb/ModSpecs/2012/PHYSmod...Lec 15&16 Wk 9 Damped and Forced Harmonic Oscillator Resonance PC 8 Wk 9 Demonstration Experiment, Prediction and Writeup Lec 17&18 Wk 10 Gravitation

34. CONTINUOUS Duration Timing

(Semester)% of finalmark

Resit/resubmissionopportunity

Penalty for latesubmission

Notes

ProgrammingExercises

1 20 Only in exceptionalcircumstances

As universitypolicy

This work is notmarked anonymously

Written ProjectProposal

1 25 Only in exceptionalcircumstances

As universitypolicy

This work is notmarked anonymously

Written Project Report 2 45 Only in exceptionalcircumstances

As universitypolicy

This work is notmarked anonymously

Oral ProjectPresentation

20 mins 2 10 Only in exceptionalcircumstances

N/A asassessment istimetabled

Anonymous markingimpossible

MODULE SPECIFICATION

The information contained in this module specification was correct at the time of publication but may be subject tochange, either during the session because of unforeseen circumstances, or following review of the module at the end ofthe session. Queries about the module should be directed to the member of staff with responsibility for the module.

1. Module Title QUANTUM MECHANICS AND ATOMIC PHYSICS

2. Module Code PHYS361

3. Year 201213

4. OriginatingDepartment

Physics

5. Faculty Fac of Science & Engineering

6. Semester First Semester

7. Credit Level Level Three

8. Credit Value 15

9. External Examiner Physics External Examiner

10. Member of staff withresponsibility for themodule

Prof P Allport Physics [email protected]

11. Module Moderator Dr A Mehta Physics [email protected]

12. Other ContributingDepartments

13. Other Staff Teachingon this Module

14. Board of Studies Physics

15. Mode of Delivery Lectures/Tutorials

16. Location Main Liverpool City Campus

Lectures Seminars Tutorials Lab/Practicals Fieldwork/Placement Other TOTAL

17. ContactHours

32 4 36

18. Non-contact hours 11419. TOTAL HOURS 150

Lectures Seminars Tutorials Lab/Practicals Fieldwork/Placement Other

20. Timetable(if known)

21. Pre-requisites before taking this module (other modules and/or general educational/academic requirements):

PHYS255 or equivalent

22. Modules for which this module is a pre-requisite:

PHYS480

23. Co-requisite modules:

None

24. Linked Modules:

25. Programme(s) (including Year of Study) to which this module is available on a mandatory basis:

26. Programme(s) (including Year of Study) to which this module is available on a required basis:

Page 46: ,'.'' ,'0''sdb/ModSpecs/2012/PHYSmod...Lec 15&16 Wk 9 Damped and Forced Harmonic Oscillator Resonance PC 8 Wk 9 Demonstration Experiment, Prediction and Writeup Lec 17&18 Wk 10 Gravitation

Programme(s) (including Year of Study) to which this module is available on a required basis:

F300 (3) F303 (3) F3F5 (3) F521 (3)

27. Programme(s) (including Year of Study) to which this module is available on an optional basis:

MODULE DESCRIPTION

28. Aims

To build on the second year module on Quantum and Atomic PhysicsTo develop the formalism of quantum mechanicsTo develop an understanding that atoms are quantum systemsTo enable the student to follow elementary quantum mechanical arguments in the literature and provide abasis for work in Semester 2 modules

29. Learning Outcomes

At the end of the module the student should have:

Understanding of the role of wavefunctions, operators, eigenvalue equations, symmetries,compatibility/non-compatibility of observables and perturbation theory in quantum mechanical theory.An ability to solve straightforward problems - different bound states and perturbing interactions.Developed knowledge and understanding of the quantum mechanical description of atoms - single particlelevels, coupled angular momentum, fine structure, transition selection rules.Developed a working knowledge of interactions, electron configurations and coupling in atoms.

30. Teaching and Learning Strategies

See Department of Physics Undergraduate Student Handbook

31. Syllabus

Quantum Mechanics:

Operators, observables, eigenfunctions and eignvaluesDirac and wavefunction representationsProbability distributionsTime evolution of wavefunctionsMany-particle systemsBound statesSimple harmonic motionAngular momentumCentral potentialFree particlesCompatible and incompatible observablesHeisenberg's uncertainty principleSymmetries - inversion, translation, rotation, exchangeGeneralisation to J, ladder operatorsSpinAddition of angular momentumPerturbation theory

Atomic Physics:

Hydrogen atom, fine structureHelium atomRadiative transitions, selection rulesMulti-electron atoms, periodic classification, Hund's rulesAtoms in a magnetic field

32. Recommended Texts

"Quantum Mechanics" by F Mandl, published by Wiley

ASSESSMENT

33. EXAM Duration Timing % of Resit/resubmission Penalty for late Notes

(Semester) finalmark

opportunity submission

Written Examination 3 hours 1 100 August resit forPGT students only.Yr3 and Yr4students resit atthe next normalopportunity.

34. CONTINUOUS Duration Timing(Semester)

% of finalmark

Resit/resubmissionopportunity

Penalty for latesubmission

Notes

Page 47: ,'.'' ,'0''sdb/ModSpecs/2012/PHYSmod...Lec 15&16 Wk 9 Damped and Forced Harmonic Oscillator Resonance PC 8 Wk 9 Demonstration Experiment, Prediction and Writeup Lec 17&18 Wk 10 Gravitation

MODULE SPECIFICATION

The information contained in this module specification was correct at the time of publication but may be subject tochange, either during the session because of unforeseen circumstances, or following review of the module at the end ofthe session. Queries about the module should be directed to the member of staff with responsibility for the module.

1. Module Title ADVANCED OBSERVATIONAL ASTRONOMY

2. Module Code PHYS362

3. Year 201213

4. OriginatingDepartment

Physics

5. Faculty Fac of Science & Engineering

6. Semester Second Semester

7. Credit Level Level Three

8. Credit Value 15

9. External Examiner Physics External Examiner

10. Member of staff withresponsibility for themodule

Dr I Steele Physics [email protected]

11. Module Moderator Dr IK Baldry Physics [email protected]

12. Other ContributingDepartments

13. Other Staff Teachingon this Module

Dr D Carter Physics [email protected]

14. Board of Studies Physics

15. Mode of Delivery Lectures/Tutorials

16. Location Main Liverpool City Campus

Lectures Seminars Tutorials Lab/Practicals Fieldwork/Placement Other TOTAL

17. ContactHours

32 4 36

18. Non-contact hours 11419. TOTAL HOURS 150

Lectures Seminars Tutorials Lab/Practicals Fieldwork/Placement Other

20. Timetable(if known)

21. Pre-requisites before taking this module (other modules and/or general educational/academic requirements):

PHYS251 and PHYS252

22. Modules for which this module is a pre-requisite:

None

23. Co-requisite modules:

None

24. Linked Modules:

25. Programme(s) (including Year of Study) to which this module is available on a mandatory basis:

26. Programme(s) (including Year of Study) to which this module is available on a required basis:

Programme(s) (including Year of Study) to which this module is available on a required basis:

F3F5 (3) F521 (3)

27. Programme(s) (including Year of Study) to which this module is available on an optional basis:

MODULE DESCRIPTION

28. Aims

To introduce students to the experimental techniques which enable astrophysicists to use the full range ofthe electromagnetic spectrum to study the physics of astronomical objects.To become familiar with the design of telescopes across the electromagnetic spectrum.To understand the physical basis of light detection across the spectrum.To understand observing techniques such as photometry, spectroscopy, adaptive optics, interferometry.

29. Learning Outcomes

At the end of the module the student should:

Understand and be able to compare and contrast the basic techniques and problems involved inobserving all wavelengths of the electromagnetic spectrumUnderstand and be able to use and experimental concepts, as applied to observational astrophysics, ofsignal-to-noise ratio, sampling, resolution.Be able to determine the observing technique most appropriate for a given scientific goal.Be able to plan observations at a variety of wavelengths

30. Teaching and Learning Strategies

See the Department of Physics Undergraduate Student Handbook

31. Syllabus

PHYS362

PHYS362 Telescopes and detectors

Basic design of telescopes across the electromagnetic spectrum.Detectors from millimeter wavelengths to gamma-rays. Physical principles,operations.

Spectroscopic techniques

Energy-sensitive detectors. Dispersive techniques based on gratings and/oretalons.

Observing and data analysis techniques

Sampling, resolution. Signal-to-noise ratio, data quality assessment.Calibration of raw data.Photometry and spectroscopy.Adaptive optics.Interferometry.

32. Recommended Texts

G. Rieke: "Detection of Light. From the Ultraviolet to the Submillimeter", Cambridge University Press, 2003(2nd edition).

D. J. Schroeder: "Astronomical Optics", Academic Press, 2000

C R Kitchin: "Astrophysical Techniques", Institute of Physics Publishing, 2003 (4th edition)

ASSESSMENT

33. EXAM Duration Timing(Semester)

% of finalmark

Resit/resubmissionopportunity

Penalty for latesubmission

Notes

Written Examination 3 hours 2 70 August resit for

Page 48: ,'.'' ,'0''sdb/ModSpecs/2012/PHYSmod...Lec 15&16 Wk 9 Damped and Forced Harmonic Oscillator Resonance PC 8 Wk 9 Demonstration Experiment, Prediction and Writeup Lec 17&18 Wk 10 Gravitation

Written Examination 3 hours 2 70 August resit forPGT students only.Yr3 and Yr4students resit atthe next normalopportunity.

34. CONTINUOUS Duration Timing(Semester)

% of finalmark

Resit/resubmissionopportunity

Penalty for latesubmission

Notes

Tutorial Work 4 hours 2 20 Only in exceptionalcircumstances

N/A asassessment istimetabled

This work is notmarked anonymously

Class Test 1 hour 2 10 Only in exceptionalcircumstances

N/A asassessment istimetabled

This work is notmarked anonymously

MODULE SPECIFICATION

The information contained in this module specification was correct at the time of publication but may be subject tochange, either during the session because of unforeseen circumstances, or following review of the module at the end ofthe session. Queries about the module should be directed to the member of staff with responsibility for the module.

1. Module Title CONDENSED MATTER PHYSICS

2. Module Code PHYS363

3. Year 201213

4. OriginatingDepartment

Physics

5. Faculty Fac of Science & Engineering

6. Semester First Semester

7. Credit Level Level Three

8. Credit Value 7.5

9. External Examiner Physics External Examiner

10. Member of staff withresponsibility for themodule

Prof CA Lucas Physics [email protected]

11. Module Moderator Prof WA Hofer Chemistry [email protected]

12. Other ContributingDepartments

13. Other Staff Teachingon this Module

14. Board of Studies Physics

15. Mode of Delivery Lectures/Tutorials

16. Location Main Liverpool City Campus

Lectures Seminars Tutorials Lab/Practicals Fieldwork/Placement Other TOTAL

17. ContactHours

16 2 18

18. Non-contact hours 5719. TOTAL HOURS 75

Lectures Seminars Tutorials Lab/Practicals Fieldwork/Placement Other

20. Timetable(if known)

21. Pre-requisites before taking this module (other modules and/or general educational/academic requirements):

None

22. Modules for which this module is a pre-requisite:

None

23. Co-requisite modules:

None

24. Linked Modules:

25. Programme(s) (including Year of Study) to which this module is available on a mandatory basis:

26. Programme(s) (including Year of Study) to which this module is available on a required basis:

Page 49: ,'.'' ,'0''sdb/ModSpecs/2012/PHYSmod...Lec 15&16 Wk 9 Damped and Forced Harmonic Oscillator Resonance PC 8 Wk 9 Demonstration Experiment, Prediction and Writeup Lec 17&18 Wk 10 Gravitation

Programme(s) (including Year of Study) to which this module is available on a required basis:

F303 (3) F352 (3)

27. Programme(s) (including Year of Study) to which this module is available on an optional basis:

MODULE DESCRIPTION

28. Aims

To develop concepts introduced in Year 1 and Year 2 modules which relate to solids.To consolidate concepts related to crystal structure and to introduce the concept of reciprocal space.To enable the students to apply these concepts to the description of crystals, lattice dynamics and theelectronic structure of condensed matter.To illustrate the use of these concepts in scientific research in condensed matter.

29. Learning Outcomes

At the end of the module the student should have:

Familiarity with the crystalline nature of both perfect and real materials.An understanding of the fundamental principles of the properties of condensed matter.An appreciation of the relationship between the real space and the reciprocal space view of the propertiesof crystalline matter.An ability to describe the crystal structure and electronic structure of matter.An awareness of current physics research in condensed matter

30. Teaching and Learning Strategies

See Department of Physics Undergraduate Handbook

31. Syllabus

Structure I: Crystallography: Crystallographic definitions, Bravais Lattices and Spacegroups, Common Crystal Structures, Indexing of crystal planes, Stacking sequences andcrystal defects (4 lectures).

Structure II: Diffraction and the Reciprocal Lattice: Laue diffraction conditions, thereciprocal lattice and diffraction, the diffracted intensity (4 lectures).

Phonons I: Crystal Vibrations: Vibrations of monatomic lattice, phonons (2 lectures).

Phonons II: Thermal Properties: Density of phonon modes, specific heat capacity -Einstein and Debye, thermal conductivity (2 lectures).

Electrons I: Free Electron Fermi Model: The free electron gas, density of states (2lectures)

Electrons II: Nearly Free Electron Model: Basics, Fermi surfaces and densities ofstates (2 lectures)

32. Recommended Texts

"Introduction to Solid State Physics" by C Kittel published by Wiley

ASSESSMENT

33. EXAM Duration Timing(Semester)

% of finalmark

Resit/resubmissionopportunity

Penalty for latesubmission

Notes

Written Examination 1 1/2hours

1 100 August resit forPGT students only.Yr3 and Yr4students resit atthe next normalopportunity.

34. CONTINUOUS Duration Timing(Semester)

% of finalmark

Resit/resubmissionopportunity

Penalty for latesubmission

Notes

mark

Page 50: ,'.'' ,'0''sdb/ModSpecs/2012/PHYSmod...Lec 15&16 Wk 9 Damped and Forced Harmonic Oscillator Resonance PC 8 Wk 9 Demonstration Experiment, Prediction and Writeup Lec 17&18 Wk 10 Gravitation

MODULE SPECIFICATION

The information contained in this module specification was correct at the time of publication but may be subject tochange, either during the session because of unforeseen circumstances, or following review of the module at the end ofthe session. Queries about the module should be directed to the member of staff with responsibility for the module.

1. Module Title ADVANCED ELECTROMAGNETISM

2. Module Code PHYS370

3. Year 201213

4. OriginatingDepartment

Physics

5. Faculty Fac of Science & Engineering

6. Semester Second Semester

7. Credit Level Level Three

8. Credit Value 15

9. External Examiner Physics External Examiner

10. Member of staff withresponsibility for themodule

Dr A Wolski Physics [email protected]

11. Module Moderator Prof R Herzberg Physics [email protected]

12. Other ContributingDepartments

13. Other Staff Teachingon this Module

14. Board of Studies Physics

15. Mode of Delivery Lectures/Tutorials

16. Location Main Liverpool City Campus

Lectures Seminars Tutorials Lab/Practicals Fieldwork/Placement Other TOTAL

17. ContactHours

32 4 36

18. Non-contact hours 11419. TOTAL HOURS 150

Lectures Seminars Tutorials Lab/Practicals Fieldwork/Placement Other

20. Timetable(if known)

21. Pre-requisites before taking this module (other modules and/or general educational/academic requirements):

PHYS254 and PHYS258 or equivalents MATH283 or equivalent is strongly recommended

22. Modules for which this module is a pre-requisite:

None

23. Co-requisite modules:

None

24. Linked Modules:

25. Programme(s) (including Year of Study) to which this module is available on a mandatory basis:

26. Programme(s) (including Year of Study) to which this module is available on a required basis:

Programme(s) (including Year of Study) to which this module is available on a required basis:

F300 (3) F303 (3)

27. Programme(s) (including Year of Study) to which this module is available on an optional basis:

MODULE DESCRIPTION

28. Aims

To build on first and second year modules on electricity, magnetism and wavesTo study solutions to the wave equation for electromagnetism in free space, in matter and at boundariesTo study solutions to the wave equation for electromagnetism in transmission lines, wave guides andcavitiesTo study propagation through dispersive mediaTo study electric dipole radiationTo study radiation from simple antenna arraysTo introduce 4-vector represnetation of electromagnetism in special relativityTo further develop the students' problem-solving and analytic skills

29. Learning Outcomes

At the end of the module the student should have:

An understanding of wave like solutions to electromagnetic problems by using plane waves and boundaryconditionsAn understanding of the principles governing the guiding of electromagnetic wavesAn understanding of the principles governing the emission and absorption at dipole antennaeAn understanding of the principles of dispersionAn understanding of retarded potentialsAn understanding of electric dipole radiationAn understanding of the transformation properties of E and BAn enhanced ability to apply problem-solving and analytic skills to solve simple problems in each of theabove areas

30. Teaching and Learning Strategies

See Department of Physics Undergraduate Handbook

31. Syllabus

Introduction, Maxwell's equations and underlying physics. Waves in free space,waves in a conducting medium. Poynting vector. Skin depth and shielding.Boundary conditions at an interface between two media. Derivation of the Fresnelequations. Polarisation on reflection, total internal reflection. Reflection from aconductor.Waves in a rectangular conducting cavity. Microwave oven. Rectangularwaveguides, TE and TM modes, energy transmission. Practical waveguides.Dielectric waveguides and optical fibres.Transmission lines. Solution of basic equations, reflection, attenuation, standingwaves. Applications of transmission lines.Dispersion. Experimental situation. Dispersion in gases, solids, liquids andconductors. Propagation in the upper atmosphere.Scalar and Vector potentials. Gauge Invariance and Charge Conservation.Retarded potentials.Dipole radiation. Near and far field approximations. Radiated power. Half waveantenna, antenna rays. Satellite communications.Electromagnetism and Special Relativity. Current and potential 4-vectors.Minkowski representation. Transformation properties of E and B, fields due tocharge in uniform motion.

32. Recommended Texts

"Electromagnetism 2nd Edition" by I S Grant & W R Phillips, published by Wiley

ASSESSMENT

Page 51: ,'.'' ,'0''sdb/ModSpecs/2012/PHYSmod...Lec 15&16 Wk 9 Damped and Forced Harmonic Oscillator Resonance PC 8 Wk 9 Demonstration Experiment, Prediction and Writeup Lec 17&18 Wk 10 Gravitation

33. EXAM Duration Timing(Semester)

% of finalmark

Resit/resubmissionopportunity

Penalty for latesubmission

Notes

Written Examination 3 hours 2 100 August resit forPGT students only.Yr3 and Yr4students resit atthe next normalopportunity.

34. CONTINUOUS Duration Timing(Semester)

% of finalmark

Resit/resubmissionopportunity

Penalty for latesubmission

Notes

MODULE SPECIFICATION

The information contained in this module specification was correct at the time of publication but may be subject tochange, either during the session because of unforeseen circumstances, or following review of the module at the end ofthe session. Queries about the module should be directed to the member of staff with responsibility for the module.

1. Module Title GALAXIES

2. Module Code PHYS373

3. Year 201213

4. OriginatingDepartment

Physics

5. Faculty Fac of Science & Engineering

6. Semester First Semester

7. Credit Level Level Three

8. Credit Value 15

9. External Examiner Physics External Examiner

10. Member of staff withresponsibility for themodule

Dr PA James Physics [email protected]

11. Module Moderator Dr M Salaris Physics [email protected]

12. Other ContributingDepartments

13. Other Staff Teachingon this Module

14. Board of Studies Physics

15. Mode of Delivery Lectures/Tutorials

16. Location Main Liverpool City Campus

Lectures Seminars Tutorials Lab/Practicals Fieldwork/Placement Other TOTAL

17. ContactHours

32 4 36

18. Non-contact hours 11419. TOTAL HOURS 150

Lectures Seminars Tutorials Lab/Practicals Fieldwork/Placement Other

20. Timetable(if known)

21. Pre-requisites before taking this module (other modules and/or general educational/academic requirements):

PHYS251

22. Modules for which this module is a pre-requisite:

None

23. Co-requisite modules:

None

24. Linked Modules:

25. Programme(s) (including Year of Study) to which this module is available on a mandatory basis:

26. Programme(s) (including Year of Study) to which this module is available on a required basis:

Page 52: ,'.'' ,'0''sdb/ModSpecs/2012/PHYSmod...Lec 15&16 Wk 9 Damped and Forced Harmonic Oscillator Resonance PC 8 Wk 9 Demonstration Experiment, Prediction and Writeup Lec 17&18 Wk 10 Gravitation

Programme(s) (including Year of Study) to which this module is available on a required basis:

F3F5 (3) F521 (4)

27. Programme(s) (including Year of Study) to which this module is available on an optional basis:

MODULE DESCRIPTION

28. Aims

To provide students with a broad overview of these complex yet fundamental systems which interact atone end with the physics of stars and the interstellar medium and at the other with cosmology and thenature of large-scale structures in the UniverseTo develop in students an understanding of how the various distinct components in galaxies evolve andinteract

29. Learning Outcomes

At the end of the module the student should have:

The ability to describe and discuss the structure and evolution of galaxies and their various componentsAn understanding of and an ability to explain the detailed interplay between these componentsKnowledge of their cumulative effect on the chemical, dynamical and spectral evolution of the galaxy as awhole

30. Teaching and Learning Strategies

See Department of Physics Undergraduate Handbook

31. Syllabus

The Structure of Galaxies

Size and basic structure of the Milky Way, the galactic centre. Morphologicalclassification of galaxies. Characteristic light profiles of spirals and ellipticals.

The Content of Galaxies

Ages and distributions of stellar populations. Atomic gas: the 21-cm line, atomichydrogen in the Milky Way and other galaxies, interstellar clouds, gas motions in theISM. Ionised gas: exciting stars, Hll regions. Abundances of other elements. Interstellardust: extinction, reddening, scattering and infrared emission. Size, shape, nature andquantity of dust.

Dynamics & Stability of Galaxies

Rotation of disc galaxies. Dark matter. The Tully-Fisher relation. Spiral structure. Velocitydispersion in elliptical galaxies and bulges. Relaxation. Time scales. Overview of bsicideas of galaxy formation. Searches for high redshift and primeval galaxies.

Evolutionary Phenomena in Galaxies

Stellar populations and the spectral evolution of galaxies. The origin and evolution of thechemical elements. Dynamical evolution and interactions of the ISM. Star formation. TheButcher-Oemler effect and the faint blue population at high redshift. Interactions andmergers, hot gas in galaxy clusters, fountains, bridges, starbursts and cooling flows.Morphology - density relations. Galaxy luminosity functions.

Active Galaxies

Quasars, nuclear black holes, Active Galactic Nuclei, and Unified Schemes.

32. Recommended Texts

"The Structure and Evolution of Galaxies", S. Phillipps, published by Wiley

"Galactic Astronomy", J Binney & M Merrifield, published by Princeton University Press

"An Introduction to Modern Astrophysics" by B Carroll & D Ostlie, published by Addison-Wesley

ASSESSMENT

33. EXAM Duration Timing(Semester)

% of finalmark

Resit/resubmissionopportunity

Penalty for latesubmission

Notes

Written Examination 3 hours 1 80 August resit forPGT students only.Yr3 and Yr4students resit atthe next normalopportunity.

34. CONTINUOUS Duration Timing(Semester)

% of finalmark

Resit/resubmissionopportunity

Penalty for latesubmission

Notes

Class Test 1 20 Only in exceptionalcircumstances

N/A asassessment istimetabled

This work is notmarked anonymously

Page 53: ,'.'' ,'0''sdb/ModSpecs/2012/PHYSmod...Lec 15&16 Wk 9 Damped and Forced Harmonic Oscillator Resonance PC 8 Wk 9 Demonstration Experiment, Prediction and Writeup Lec 17&18 Wk 10 Gravitation

MODULE SPECIFICATION

The information contained in this module specification was correct at the time of publication but may be subject tochange, either during the session because of unforeseen circumstances, or following review of the module at the end ofthe session. Queries about the module should be directed to the member of staff with responsibility for the module.

1. Module Title RELATIVITY AND COSMOLOGY

2. Module Code PHYS374

3. Year 201213

4. OriginatingDepartment

Physics

5. Faculty Fac of Science & Engineering

6. Semester Second Semester

7. Credit Level Level Three

8. Credit Value 15

9. External Examiner Physics External Examiner

10. Member of staff withresponsibility for themodule

Dr IK Baldry Physics [email protected]

11. Module Moderator Dr I Steele Physics [email protected]

12. Other ContributingDepartments

13. Other Staff Teachingon this Module

Prof C Collins PhysicsDr MJ Darnley Physics [email protected]

14. Board of Studies Physics

15. Mode of Delivery Lectures/Tutorials

16. Location Main Liverpool City Campus

Lectures Seminars Tutorials Lab/Practicals Fieldwork/Placement Other TOTAL

17. ContactHours

32 4 36

18. Non-contact hours 11419. TOTAL HOURS 150

Lectures Seminars Tutorials Lab/Practicals Fieldwork/Placement Other

20. Timetable(if known)

21. Pre-requisites before taking this module (other modules and/or general educational/academic requirements):

None

22. Modules for which this module is a pre-requisite:

None

23. Co-requisite modules:

None

24. Linked Modules:

25. Programme(s) (including Year of Study) to which this module is available on a mandatory basis:

26. Programme(s) (including Year of Study) to which this module is available on a required basis:

F3F5 (3) F521 (3)

27. Programme(s) (including Year of Study) to which this module is available on an optional basis:

MODULE DESCRIPTION

28. Aims

To introduce the ideas of general relativity and demonstrate its relevance to modern astrophysicsTo provide students with a full and rounded introduction to modern observational cosmologyTo develop the basic theoretical background required to understand and appreciate the significance ofrecent results from facilities such as the Hubble Space Telescope and the Wilkinson MicrowaveAnisotropy Probe

29. Learning Outcomes

At the end of the module the student should have:

The ability to explain the relationship between Newtonian gravity and Einstein's General Relativity (GR)Understanding of the concept of curved space time and knowledge of metricsA broad and up-to-date knowledge of the basic ideas, most important discoveries and outstandingproblems in modern cosmologyKnowledge of how simple cosmological models of the universe are constructedThe ability to calculate physical parameters and make observational predictions for a range of suchmodels.

30. Teaching and Learning Strategies

Module will be delivered in 32 lectures and accompanied by written handouts, which closely follow the material.Lecturer will make use of recent observational results in the field to underpin concepts and help explain thereasoning behind the most popular cosmological models. In addition to the usual tutorials, a few lectures will beturned into classwork using past exam paper questions.

31. Syllabus

The physical basis of General Relativity (GR)

The need for relativistic ideas and a theory of gravitation. Difficulties with Newtonianmechanics and the inadequacy of special relativity. Mach's principles, Einstein's principleof equivalence.

Curved spacetime

Geodesics, curved spaces, the metric tensor and the relationship between curvature andgravitation. Schwarzschild Metric.

Introduction to Cosmology

The origin and fate of the Universe. From Pythagoras to Herschel. Assumptionsunderlying the modern cosmology. Galaxies, clusters and superclusters.

Geometry of the Universe

Euclidean and curved spaces. Robertson-Walker (RW) metric. Expansion and theHubble law. Redshift as a consequence of RW metric. Cosmological angular diameter-distance and luminosity-distance relations.

Dynamical evolution

The dynamical equations. The Friedmann models, open, closed, Einstein-de Sittercases. Definition of Qo and Wo. The age of the Universe. Proper luminosity and angulardistances in terms of Ho and z. Minimal angular diameter. Horizon size. Determinationsof cosmological parameters. The distance scale. Limits on qo and Wo.

The Hot Big Bang

Matter and radiation dominated eras. Nucleosynthesis in the early universe. Cosmic

Page 54: ,'.'' ,'0''sdb/ModSpecs/2012/PHYSmod...Lec 15&16 Wk 9 Damped and Forced Harmonic Oscillator Resonance PC 8 Wk 9 Demonstration Experiment, Prediction and Writeup Lec 17&18 Wk 10 Gravitation

Background Radiation (CBR). Brief history of the Universe from the Planck time to thepresent day.

The New Cosmology

Variations on the Standard Model. Inflation. Grand Unified Theories. The AnthropicPrinciple. The Cosmological Constant.

The History of Structure

Density fluctuations at early times. Hot and cold dark matter. Results of numericalsimulations. Matter on large scales. Evidence for dark matter. Clustering seen in varioussurveys. Gravitational lensing.

32. Recommended Texts

"Introduction to Modern Cosmology", A Liddle, (1999) published by Wiley

Background Reading

"Cosmological Physics", J Peacock (1999) published by CUP

"Cosmology", P Coles & F Lucchin (2001) published by Wiley

"Introduction to Cosmology", J V Narlikar (1993) published by CUP

"Cosmology: A First Course", M Luchieze-Rey (1995) published by CUP

ASSESSMENT

33. EXAM Duration Timing(Semester)

% of finalmark

Resit/resubmissionopportunity

Penalty for latesubmission

Notes

Written Examination 3 hours 2 80 August resit forPGT students only.Yr3 and Yr4students resit atthe next normalopportunity.

34. CONTINUOUS Duration Timing(Semester)

% of finalmark

Resit/resubmissionopportunity

Penalty for latesubmission

Notes

Written Assignment 2 20 Only in exceptionalcircumstances

As universitypolicy

This work is notmarked anonymously

MODULE SPECIFICATION

The information contained in this module specification was correct at the time of publication but may be subject tochange, either during the session because of unforeseen circumstances, or following review of the module at the end ofthe session. Queries about the module should be directed to the member of staff with responsibility for the module.

1. Module Title NUCLEAR PHYSICS

2. Module Code PHYS375

3. Year 201213

4. OriginatingDepartment

Physics

5. Faculty Fac of Science & Engineering

6. Semester First Semester

7. Credit Level Level Three

8. Credit Value 7.5

9. External Examiner Physics External Examiner

10. Member of staff withresponsibility for themodule

Dr M Chartier Physics [email protected]

11. Module Moderator Dr AJ Boston Physics [email protected]

12. Other ContributingDepartments

13. Other Staff Teachingon this Module

14. Board of Studies Physics

15. Mode of Delivery Lectures/Tutorials

16. Location Main Liverpool City Campus

Lectures Seminars Tutorials Lab/Practicals Fieldwork/Placement Other TOTAL

17. ContactHours

16 2 18

18. Non-contact hours 5719. TOTAL HOURS 75

Lectures Seminars Tutorials Lab/Practicals Fieldwork/Placement Other

20. Timetable(if known)

21. Pre-requisites before taking this module (other modules and/or general educational/academic requirements):

PHYS256 or equivalent

22. Modules for which this module is a pre-requisite:

PHYS490

23. Co-requisite modules:

None

24. Linked Modules:

25. Programme(s) (including Year of Study) to which this module is available on a mandatory basis:

26. Programme(s) (including Year of Study) to which this module is available on a required basis:

Page 55: ,'.'' ,'0''sdb/ModSpecs/2012/PHYSmod...Lec 15&16 Wk 9 Damped and Forced Harmonic Oscillator Resonance PC 8 Wk 9 Demonstration Experiment, Prediction and Writeup Lec 17&18 Wk 10 Gravitation

Programme(s) (including Year of Study) to which this module is available on a required basis:

F303 (3) F3F5 (3) F521 (3) F352 (3)

27. Programme(s) (including Year of Study) to which this module is available on an optional basis:

F350 (3) F300 (3)

MODULE DESCRIPTION

28. Aims

To build on the second year module involving Nuclear PhysicsTo develop an understanding of the modern view of nuclei, how they are modelled and of nuclear decayprocesses

29. Learning Outcomes

At the end of the module the student should have:

Knowledge of evidence for the shell model of nuclei, its development and the successes and failures ofthe model in explaining nuclear propertiesKnowledge of the collective vibrational and rotational models of nucleiBasic knowledge of nuclear decay processes, alpha decay and fission, of gamma-ray transitions andinternal conversionKnowledge of isospin and its significance for nuclear structure and reactions

30. Teaching and Learning Strategies

See Department of Physics Undergraduate Handbook

31. Syllabus

Bulk properties of nuclei

Nuclear constituents, the nuclear chartMass, binding energy, the liquid-drop modelSeparation energy, reaction Q-valueNuclear size, cross section, charge distribution

Nuclear instability

Nuclear energy surface, valley of stability, drip linesIsobaric disintegrations: beta-decay and electron captureAlpha-decay and fissionOther decay modes

The nuclear interaction

Strong intensity, short range, the nuclear potentialIsospin, charge independenceDi-nucleon statesSpin dependenceCharge exchangeIsobaric analogue states

Nuclear structure models

The nuclear many-body problemSingle-particle model: the mean fieldThe spherical nuclear shell-modelCollective structure of nuclei: vibrational and rotational models

Electromagnetic nuclear properties

Electromagnetic nuclear momentsElectromagnetic radiation - gamma-decayWeisskopf estimatesInternal conversion

32. Recommended Texts

"An Introduction to Nuclear Physics" by W N Cottingham and D A Greenwood, Cambridge Publishers

ASSESSMENT

33. EXAM Duration Timing(Semester)

% of finalmark

Resit/resubmissionopportunity

Penalty for latesubmission

Notes

Written Examination 1 1/2hours

1 100 August resit forPGT students only.Yr3 and Yr4students resit atthe next normalopportunity.

34. CONTINUOUS Duration Timing(Semester)

% of finalmark

Resit/resubmissionopportunity

Penalty for latesubmission

Notes

Page 56: ,'.'' ,'0''sdb/ModSpecs/2012/PHYSmod...Lec 15&16 Wk 9 Damped and Forced Harmonic Oscillator Resonance PC 8 Wk 9 Demonstration Experiment, Prediction and Writeup Lec 17&18 Wk 10 Gravitation

MODULE SPECIFICATION

The information contained in this module specification was correct at the time of publication but may be subject tochange, either during the session because of unforeseen circumstances, or following review of the module at the end ofthe session. Queries about the module should be directed to the member of staff with responsibility for the module.

1. Module Title INTRODUCTION TO PARTICLE PHYSICS

2. Module Code PHYS377

3. Year 201213

4. OriginatingDepartment

Physics

5. Faculty Fac of Science & Engineering

6. Semester Second Semester

7. Credit Level Level Three

8. Credit Value 7.5

9. External Examiner Physics External Examiner

10. Member of staff withresponsibility for themodule

Prof M Klein Physics [email protected]

11. Module Moderator Prof P Allport Physics [email protected]

12. Other ContributingDepartments

13. Other Staff Teachingon this Module

14. Board of Studies Physics

15. Mode of Delivery Lectures/Tutorials

16. Location Main Liverpool City Campus

Lectures Seminars Tutorials Lab/Practicals Fieldwork/Placement Other TOTAL

17. ContactHours

16 4 20

18. Non-contact hours 5519. TOTAL HOURS 75

Lectures Seminars Tutorials Lab/Practicals Fieldwork/Placement Other

20. Timetable(if known)

21. Pre-requisites before taking this module (other modules and/or general educational/academic requirements):

PHYS361 or equivalent

22. Modules for which this module is a pre-requisite:

None

23. Co-requisite modules:

None

24. Linked Modules:

25. Programme(s) (including Year of Study) to which this module is available on a mandatory basis:

26. Programme(s) (including Year of Study) to which this module is available on a required basis:

Programme(s) (including Year of Study) to which this module is available on a required basis:

F521 (3) F3F5 (3) F303 (3)

27. Programme(s) (including Year of Study) to which this module is available on an optional basis:

MODULE DESCRIPTION

28. Aims

To build on the second year module involving Nuclear and Particle PhysicsTo develop an understanding of the modern view of particles, of their interactions and the Standard Model

29. Learning Outcomes

At the end of the module the student should have:

Basic understanding of relativistic kinematics (as applied to collisions, decay processes and crosssections)Descriptive knowledge of the Standard Model using a non rigorous Feynman diagram approachKnowledge of the fundamental particles of the Standard Model and the experimental evidence for theStandard ModelKnowledge of conservation laws and discrete symmetries

30. Teaching and Learning Strategies

See Department of Physics Undergraduate Handbook

31. Syllabus

Introduction (1 Lecture)

Overview of particle physics

Relativistic Kinematics and Cross Sections (2 Lectures)

Energy, momentum four vectors, short-lived particles, laboratory frame, fixed targetexperiments, centre-of-momentum frame, colliding beam experiments, luminosity.

Quantum Numbers (1 Lectures)

Charge, Coulour, Baryon, Lepton numbers, spin.

The Standard Model (7 Lectures)

Feyman diagrams, Electromagnetic interactions, electron-positron annihilation, colourfactor, coupling constants, Deep inelastic scattering, Weak interactions, neutrinos, vectorbosons, allowed decays, propagator, forbidden decays, Cabbibo, Tau decays, neutrinomass, Strong interactions, Gluons, Colour, Quantum Chromodynamics.

Calculations (1 Lecture)

Exercises on calculations from previous lectures

Detectors and Accelerators (2 Lectures)

Tracking, calorimetry, accelerator principles

Outlook and Summary (2 lectures)

Future development of particle physics, open questions and summary of course

32. Recommended Texts

"Particle Physics" by B Martin and G Shaw, published by Wiley

ASSESSMENT

33. EXAM Duration Timing(Semester)

% of final

Resit/resubmissionopportunity

Penalty for latesubmission

Notes

Page 57: ,'.'' ,'0''sdb/ModSpecs/2012/PHYSmod...Lec 15&16 Wk 9 Damped and Forced Harmonic Oscillator Resonance PC 8 Wk 9 Demonstration Experiment, Prediction and Writeup Lec 17&18 Wk 10 Gravitation

mark Written Examination 1 1/2

hours2 100 August resit for

PGT students only.Yr3 and Yr4students resit atthe next normalopportunity.

34. CONTINUOUS Duration Timing(Semester)

% of finalmark

Resit/resubmissionopportunity

Penalty for latesubmission

Notes

MODULE SPECIFICATION

The information contained in this module specification was correct at the time of publication but may be subject tochange, either during the session because of unforeseen circumstances, or following review of the module at the end ofthe session. Queries about the module should be directed to the member of staff with responsibility for the module.

1. Module Title ADVANCED PRACTICAL PHYSICS (BSC)

2. Module Code PHYS378

3. Year 201213

4. OriginatingDepartment

Physics

5. Faculty Fac of Science & Engineering

6. Semester First Semester

7. Credit Level Level Three

8. Credit Value 15

9. External Examiner Physics External Examiner

10. Member of staff withresponsibility for themodule

Dr DS Martin Physics [email protected]

11. Module Moderator Prof CA Lucas Physics [email protected]

12. Other ContributingDepartments

13. Other Staff Teachingon this Module

Dr A Mehta Physics [email protected] PJ Nolan Physics [email protected] P Rowlands Physics [email protected] R Herzberg Physics [email protected] J Kretzschmar Physics [email protected]

14. Board of Studies Physics

15. Mode of Delivery Practicals

16. Location Main Liverpool City Campus

Lectures Seminars Tutorials Lab/Practicals Fieldwork/Placement Other TOTAL

17. ContactHours

108 108

18. Non-contact hours 4219. TOTAL HOURS 150

Lectures Seminars Tutorials Lab/Practicals Fieldwork/Placement Other

20. Timetable(if known)

Tuesdays 10:00-17:00 and Wednesdays10:00-13:00, CTL

21. Pre-requisites before taking this module (other modules and/or general educational/academic requirements):

PHYS111 or equivalent

22. Modules for which this module is a pre-requisite:

None

23. Co-requisite modules:

None

24. Linked Modules:

Page 58: ,'.'' ,'0''sdb/ModSpecs/2012/PHYSmod...Lec 15&16 Wk 9 Damped and Forced Harmonic Oscillator Resonance PC 8 Wk 9 Demonstration Experiment, Prediction and Writeup Lec 17&18 Wk 10 Gravitation

25. Programme(s) (including Year of Study) to which this module is available on a mandatory basis:

26. Programme(s) (including Year of Study) to which this module is available on a required basis:

F3F7 (3) F300 (3) F350 (3)

27. Programme(s) (including Year of Study) to which this module is available on an optional basis:

MODULE DESCRIPTION

28. Aims

To give further training in laboratory techniques, in the use of computer packages for modelling andanalysis, and in the use of modern instrumentsTo develop the students' independent judgement in performing physics experimentsTo encourage students to research aspects of physics complementary to material met in lectures andtutorialsTo consolidate the students ability to produce good quality work against realistic deadlines

29. Learning Outcomes

At the end of the module the student should have:

Experience of taking physics data with modern equipmentKnowledge of some experimental techniques not met in previous laboratory practiceDeveloped a personal responsibility for assuring that data taken is of a high qualityIncreased skills in data taking and error analysisIncreased skills in reporting experiments and an appreciation of the factors needed to produce clear andcomplete reportsImproved skills in the time management and organisation of their experimental procedures to meetdeadlinesExperience working as an individual and in small groups

30. Teaching and Learning Strategies

See Department of Physics Undergraduate Handbook

31. Syllabus

Students carry out experiments in three 4-week blocks:

Block A Radiation Detection

Three experiments concerning the detection of both beta and gamma radiation fromradioactive sources, some of which are from samples that have been activated by asource of thermal neutrons.

Block B X-Ray Diffraction

Group work on computer modelling to simulate x-ray diffraction from crystals followed byexperiments to determine the crystal structures and lattice constants of two unknownmaterials.

Block C Quanta and Waves

Group work followed by two individual experiments on the explanation of quantum and/orwave phenomena.

32. Recommended Texts

None

ASSESSMENT

33. EXAM Duration Timing(Semester)

% of final

Resit/resubmissionopportunity

Penalty for latesubmission

Notes

mark 34. CONTINUOUS Duration Timing

(Semester)% of finalmark

Resit/resubmissionopportunity

Penalty for latesubmission

Notes

Experimental Reports(including group work)

1 90 Only in exceptionalcircumstances

As universitypolicy

Experimental reportsare markedanonymously

Laboratory Diary 1 10 Only in exceptionalcircumstances

As universitypolicy

This work is notmarked anonymously

Page 59: ,'.'' ,'0''sdb/ModSpecs/2012/PHYSmod...Lec 15&16 Wk 9 Damped and Forced Harmonic Oscillator Resonance PC 8 Wk 9 Demonstration Experiment, Prediction and Writeup Lec 17&18 Wk 10 Gravitation

MODULE SPECIFICATION

The information contained in this module specification was correct at the time of publication but may be subject tochange, either during the session because of unforeseen circumstances, or following review of the module at the end ofthe session. Queries about the module should be directed to the member of staff with responsibility for the module.

1. Module Title PROJECT (BSC)

2. Module Code PHYS379

3. Year 201213

4. OriginatingDepartment

Physics

5. Faculty Fac of Science & Engineering

6. Semester Second Semester

7. Credit Level Level Three

8. Credit Value 15

9. External Examiner Physics External Examiner

10. Member of staff withresponsibility for themodule

Dr U Klein Physics [email protected]

11. Module Moderator Prof CA Lucas Physics [email protected]

12. Other ContributingDepartments

13. Other Staff Teachingon this Module

Prof R Herzberg Physics [email protected]

14. Board of Studies Physics

15. Mode of Delivery Project

16. Location Main Liverpool City Campus

Lectures Seminars Tutorials Lab/Practicals Fieldwork/Placement Other TOTAL

17. ContactHours

108 108

18. Non-contact hours 4219. TOTAL HOURS 150

Lectures Seminars Tutorials Lab/Practicals Fieldwork/Placement Other

20. Timetable(if known)

21. Pre-requisites before taking this module (other modules and/or general educational/academic requirements):

None

22. Modules for which this module is a pre-requisite:

None

23. Co-requisite modules:

None

24. Linked Modules:

25. Programme(s) (including Year of Study) to which this module is available on a mandatory basis:

26. Programme(s) (including Year of Study) to which this module is available on a required basis:

Programme(s) (including Year of Study) to which this module is available on a required basis:

F300 (3) F3F5 (3)

27. Programme(s) (including Year of Study) to which this module is available on an optional basis:

MODULE DESCRIPTION

28. Aims

To give students experience of working independently on an original problemTo give students an opportunity to display the high quality of their workTo give students an opportunity to display qualities such as initiative and ingenuityTo improve students ability to keep daily records of the work in hand and its outcomesTo give students experience of report writing displaying high standards of composition and productionTo give an opportunity for students to display communication skills

29. Learning Outcomes

At the end of the module the student should have:

Experience of participation in planning all aspects of the workExperience researching literature and other sources of relevant informationImproved skills and initiative in carrying out investigationsImproved ability to organise and manage timeImproved skills in making up a diary recording day by day progress of the projectImproved skills in report writingImproved skills in preparing and delivering oral presentations

30. Teaching and Learning Strategies

See Department of Physics Undergraduate Handbook

31. Syllabus

A project outlined in general by a Supervisor will be assigned to the Student by theModule Organiser. In making his selections the Module Organiser generally attempts tochoose projects which match each student's particular interests but cannot guarantee todo so.

The student will keep a day by day diary showing the work done on and the progress ofthe project. Details of the project aims will be decided in discussions between the studentand the supervisor.

There will be regular scheduled meetings between the student and the supervisor toassess progress. At the end of the third week of the project, the student will produce ashort written report which will specify the aims of the remainder of the project. This reportmust be filed in the Student Office.

The supervisor will advise the student when to finish and devote all remaining time towriting the Report and preparing the Presentation.

The Presentation will be given in one of the scheduled sessions.

The Report and project diary will be handed in before the end of the twelfth week afterthe official start of the project, or at any other time that may be officially announced.

A Risk Assessment must be completed by the supervisor when the use of specialistequipment, chemicals or radioactive sources are involved. This must be signed by thestudent and the supervisor.

32. Recommended Texts

None

ASSESSMENT

33. EXAM Duration Timing(Semester)

% of final

Resit/resubmissionopportunity

Penalty for latesubmission

Notes

Page 60: ,'.'' ,'0''sdb/ModSpecs/2012/PHYSmod...Lec 15&16 Wk 9 Damped and Forced Harmonic Oscillator Resonance PC 8 Wk 9 Demonstration Experiment, Prediction and Writeup Lec 17&18 Wk 10 Gravitation

mark 34. CONTINUOUS Duration Timing

(Semester)% of finalmark

Resit/resubmissionopportunity

Penalty for latesubmission

Notes

Project and Report 2 50 Only in exceptionalcircumstances

As universitypolicy

This work is notmarked anonymously

Report 2 30 Only in exceptionalcircumstances

As universitypolicy

This work is notmarked anonymously

Oral Presentation 15 mins 2 20 Only in exceptionalcircumstances

N/A asassessment istimetabled

Anonymous markingimpossible

MODULE SPECIFICATION

The information contained in this module specification was correct at the time of publication but may be subject tochange, either during the session because of unforeseen circumstances, or following review of the module at the end ofthe session. Queries about the module should be directed to the member of staff with responsibility for the module.

1. Module Title SURFACE PHYSICS

2. Module Code PHYS381

3. Year 201213

4. OriginatingDepartment

Physics

5. Faculty Fac of Science & Engineering

6. Semester Second Semester

7. Credit Level Level Three

8. Credit Value 7.5

9. External Examiner Physics External Examiner

10. Member of staff withresponsibility for themodule

Dr HR Sharma Physics [email protected]

11. Module Moderator Prof P Weightman Physics [email protected]

12. Other ContributingDepartments

13. Other Staff Teachingon this Module

14. Board of Studies Physics

15. Mode of Delivery Lectures/Tutorials

16. Location Main Liverpool City Campus

Lectures Seminars Tutorials Lab/Practicals Fieldwork/Placement Other TOTAL

17. ContactHours

16 2 18

18. Non-contact hours 5719. TOTAL HOURS 75

Lectures Seminars Tutorials Lab/Practicals Fieldwork/Placement Other

20. Timetable(if known)

21. Pre-requisites before taking this module (other modules and/or general educational/academic requirements):

None

22. Modules for which this module is a pre-requisite:

None

23. Co-requisite modules:

None

24. Linked Modules:

25. Programme(s) (including Year of Study) to which this module is available on a mandatory basis:

26. Programme(s) (including Year of Study) to which this module is available on a required basis:

Page 61: ,'.'' ,'0''sdb/ModSpecs/2012/PHYSmod...Lec 15&16 Wk 9 Damped and Forced Harmonic Oscillator Resonance PC 8 Wk 9 Demonstration Experiment, Prediction and Writeup Lec 17&18 Wk 10 Gravitation

Programme(s) (including Year of Study) to which this module is available on a required basis:

27. Programme(s) (including Year of Study) to which this module is available on an optional basis:

MODULE DESCRIPTION

28. Aims

To explain the physical properties of surfacesTo convey an understanding of the techniques of surface physicsTo convey an understanding of the extent to which surface properties can be monitored and controlledTo show how the properties of surfaces are of technological importance

29. Learning Outcomes

At the end of the module the student should have:

Knowledge of the experimental facts concerning surface propertiesInsight into the principles of the techniques employed in surface physicsAn appreciation of the extent to which surface properties can be controlled and their relevance totechnologies

30. Teaching and Learning Strategies

The course material specified in the syllabus will be covered in lectures.

The tutorial work will provide students with the opportunity to confirm their understanding of the material coveredin the lectures.

31. Syllabus

Introduction

The origin, history and importance of surface physics

Ultra-high vacuum and surface preparation techniques

Vacuum pumps. Design of vacuum systems

Surface crystallography

Low index surfaces, vicinal surfaces, wood's notation, matrix notation,superlattice, surface reciprocal lattice

Physical Structure of Surfaces

Low Energy Electron Diffraction (LEED)Scanning probes: STMStructureSi(100) 2x1 and S(111) 7x7 reconstructed surfaces

Growth

Crystal growth, interface growth modesGrowth techniques, MBE, MOCVDReflection high energy electron diffraction (RHEED)Optical monitoring of growthAims of III-V growth

Electron spectroscopy and surface analysis

Electron escape depths, X-ray and uv photoelectron spectroscopies (XPS,UVPS), Auger spectroscopy for elemental analysis (AES), Core level shifts

Case studies: The relevance of surface science to technology

Band gap engineering, III-V semiconductor alloysIntegrating Si and GaAs technologiesThe growth of diamond

32. Recommended Texts

"Introduction to Surface Physics" by M Prutton, published by Oxford (1994)

ASSESSMENT

33. EXAM Duration Timing(Semester)

% of finalmark

Resit/resubmissionopportunity

Penalty for latesubmission

Notes

Written Examination 1 1/2hours

2 100 August resit forPGT students only.Yr3 and Yr4students resit atthe next normalopportunity.

34. CONTINUOUS Duration Timing(Semester)

% of finalmark

Resit/resubmissionopportunity

Penalty for latesubmission

Notes

Page 62: ,'.'' ,'0''sdb/ModSpecs/2012/PHYSmod...Lec 15&16 Wk 9 Damped and Forced Harmonic Oscillator Resonance PC 8 Wk 9 Demonstration Experiment, Prediction and Writeup Lec 17&18 Wk 10 Gravitation

MODULE SPECIFICATION

The information contained in this module specification was correct at the time of publication but may be subject tochange, either during the session because of unforeseen circumstances, or following review of the module at the end ofthe session. Queries about the module should be directed to the member of staff with responsibility for the module.

1. Module Title PHYSICS OF LIFE

2. Module Code PHYS382

3. Year 201213

4. OriginatingDepartment

Physics

5. Faculty Fac of Science & Engineering

6. Semester Second Semester

7. Credit Level Level Three

8. Credit Value 7.5

9. External Examiner Physics External Examiner

10. Member of staff withresponsibility for themodule

Prof P Weightman Physics [email protected]

11. Module Moderator Dr HR Sharma Physics [email protected]

12. Other ContributingDepartments

13. Other Staff Teachingon this Module

14. Board of Studies Physics

15. Mode of Delivery Lectures/Tutorials

16. Location Main Liverpool City Campus

Lectures Seminars Tutorials Lab/Practicals Fieldwork/Placement Other TOTAL

17. ContactHours

16 2 18

18. Non-contact hours 5719. TOTAL HOURS 75

Lectures Seminars Tutorials Lab/Practicals Fieldwork/Placement Other

20. Timetable(if known)

21. Pre-requisites before taking this module (other modules and/or general educational/academic requirements):

None

22. Modules for which this module is a pre-requisite:

None

23. Co-requisite modules:

None

24. Linked Modules:

25. Programme(s) (including Year of Study) to which this module is available on a mandatory basis:

26. Programme(s) (including Year of Study) to which this module is available on a required basis:

Programme(s) (including Year of Study) to which this module is available on a required basis:

27. Programme(s) (including Year of Study) to which this module is available on an optional basis:

MODULE DESCRIPTION

28. Aims

To explain the constraints on physical forces which are necessary for life to evolve in the UniverseTo describe the characteristics of life on earthTo describe physical techniques used in the study of biological systems

29. Learning Outcomes

At the end of the module the student should have:

An understanding of the framework of physical forces within which life is possibleAn understanding of the nature of life on earthFamiliarity with physical techniques used in the study of biological systems

30. Teaching and Learning Strategies

The course material specified in the syllabus will be covered in lectures.

The tutorial work will provide students with the opportunity to confirm their understanding of the material coveredin the lectures.

31. Syllabus

The Universe

Brief overview of the basic physical forces. Necessary conditions for the evolution of theUniverse into a system in which chemistry and life are possible. The evolution of atoms.Nuclear stability.

The molecular basis of life

The chemistry of life on earth

The genetic code and the chirality of life.

DNA, RNA amino acids and proteins. Protein folding. Chirality of living systems.

Physical techniques for studying biological systems

X-ray and optical techniques for the determination of the structure and function ofbiological systems.

Thermodynamic considerations and self organisation in chemical systems

Brief overview of thermodynamics and statistical mechanics. The arrow of time.

Chemical processes close toequilibrium, Free energies, crystallisation, Order andinactivity.

Chemical processes far from equilibrium. Non equilibrium thermodynamics

Energy flows. Instability and self organisation

The importance of information in biology

Page 63: ,'.'' ,'0''sdb/ModSpecs/2012/PHYSmod...Lec 15&16 Wk 9 Damped and Forced Harmonic Oscillator Resonance PC 8 Wk 9 Demonstration Experiment, Prediction and Writeup Lec 17&18 Wk 10 Gravitation

Biological evolution.

Summary of the major transitions in evolution

No foresight and no way back.

32. Recommended Texts

"Just six numbers" by M Rees (Weiderfield and Nicholson 1999)

ASSESSMENT

33. EXAM Duration Timing(Semester)

% of finalmark

Resit/resubmissionopportunity

Penalty for latesubmission

Notes

Written Examination 1 1/2hours

2 100 August resit forPGT students only.Yr3 and Yr4students resit atthe next normalopportunity.

34. CONTINUOUS Duration Timing(Semester)

% of finalmark

Resit/resubmissionopportunity

Penalty for latesubmission

Notes

MODULE SPECIFICATION

The information contained in this module specification was correct at the time of publication but may be subject tochange, either during the session because of unforeseen circumstances, or following review of the module at the end ofthe session. Queries about the module should be directed to the member of staff with responsibility for the module.

1. Module Title FURTHER STELLAR ASTROPHYSICS

2. Module Code PHYS383

3. Year 201213

4. OriginatingDepartment

Physics

5. Faculty Fac of Science & Engineering

6. Semester First Semester

7. Credit Level Level Three

8. Credit Value 15

9. External Examiner Physics External Examiner

10. Member of staff withresponsibility for themodule

Dr M Salaris Physics

11. Module Moderator Dr MJ Darnley Physics [email protected]

12. Other ContributingDepartments

13. Other Staff Teachingon this Module

14. Board of Studies Physics

15. Mode of Delivery Lectures/Tutorials

16. Location Main Liverpool City Campus

Lectures Seminars Tutorials Lab/Practicals Fieldwork/Placement Other TOTAL

17. ContactHours

36 4 40

18. Non-contact hours 11019. TOTAL HOURS 150

Lectures Seminars Tutorials Lab/Practicals Fieldwork/Placement Other

20. Timetable(if known)

21. Pre-requisites before taking this module (other modules and/or general educational/academic requirements):

PHYS251

22. Modules for which this module is a pre-requisite:

None

23. Co-requisite modules:

None

24. Linked Modules:

25. Programme(s) (including Year of Study) to which this module is available on a mandatory basis:

26. Programme(s) (including Year of Study) to which this module is available on a required basis:

Page 64: ,'.'' ,'0''sdb/ModSpecs/2012/PHYSmod...Lec 15&16 Wk 9 Damped and Forced Harmonic Oscillator Resonance PC 8 Wk 9 Demonstration Experiment, Prediction and Writeup Lec 17&18 Wk 10 Gravitation

Programme(s) (including Year of Study) to which this module is available on a required basis:

F521 (3)

27. Programme(s) (including Year of Study) to which this module is available on an optional basis:

F3F5 (3)

MODULE DESCRIPTION

28. Aims

To build upon the Level 2 module that introduced the fundamental concepts of modern stellarastrophysics and provide a more detailed analysis of several important areasTo provide an explanation of the theory of stellar evolution, its relationship to observational data and itsimportance to other problems in astrophysicsTo describe the evolutionary phenomena of binary star systemsTo investigate objects such as white dwarf stars, neutron stars and black holes

29. Learning Outcomes

At the end of the module the student should have:

A firm grasp of the fundamentals of the theory of stellar evolutionA clear idea of how the theory of stellar evolution relates to observational data and its importance to otherareas of astrophysicsThe ability to recognise and describe the origin and evolution of the characteristics of different types ofinteracting binary systems

30. Teaching and Learning Strategies

See Department of Physics Undergraduate Handbook

31. Syllabus

Pre-main-sequence evolution

Star forming regions; fragmentation and collapse; Hayashi tracks; brown dwarfs. Themain sequence: mass limits; evolution across the sequence; solar and stellar winds.

Post-main-sequence evolution

Evolution of stars of different masses; evolution through the Hertzprung gap; heliumburning and shell burning

Final states of evolution

Thermal pulses and instability; fate of low mass stars; mass loss; planetary nebulae.Chandrasekhar limit: white dwards. supernovae and supernova remnants; neutron stars;black holes

Stellar populations

Concept and definitions; simple stellar populations; age and distance determinationsfrom stellar models and stellar population synthesis

Interacting binaries, mass transfer and outbursts

Roche equipotentials and Roche lobe overflow; detached, semi-detached and contactbinaries; accretion discs/columns and wind accretion; cataclysmic variables: classical,dwarf and recurrent novae; binary evolution; Type 1 supernovae

32. Recommended Texts

"Modern Astrophysics" by B W Carroll & D A Ostlie, published by Addison-Wesley

Background Reading

"The Stars: Their Structure & Evolution" by R J Taylor, published by CUP

"Stellar Structure & Evolution", by R Kippenhahn, published by Springer-Verlag

ASSESSMENT

33. EXAM Duration Timing(Semester)

% of finalmark

Resit/resubmissionopportunity

Penalty for latesubmission

Notes

Written Examination 3 hours 1 80 August resit forPGT students only.Yr3 and Yr4students resit atthe next normalopportunity.

34. CONTINUOUS Duration Timing(Semester)

% of finalmark

Resit/resubmissionopportunity

Penalty for latesubmission

Notes

Class Test 1 10 Only in exceptionalcircumstances

N/A asassessment istimetabled

This work is notmarked anonymously

Oral Presentation 20 mins 1 10 Only in exceptionalcircumstances

N/A asassessment istimetabled

Anonymous markingimpossible

Page 65: ,'.'' ,'0''sdb/ModSpecs/2012/PHYSmod...Lec 15&16 Wk 9 Damped and Forced Harmonic Oscillator Resonance PC 8 Wk 9 Demonstration Experiment, Prediction and Writeup Lec 17&18 Wk 10 Gravitation

MODULE SPECIFICATION

The information contained in this module specification was correct at the time of publication but may be subject tochange, either during the session because of unforeseen circumstances, or following review of the module at the end ofthe session. Queries about the module should be directed to the member of staff with responsibility for the module.

1. Module Title RADIATION THERAPY APPLICATIONS

2. Module Code PHYS384

3. Year 201213

4. OriginatingDepartment

Physics

5. Faculty Fac of Science & Engineering

6. Semester Second Semester

7. Credit Level Level Three

8. Credit Value 15

9. External Examiner Physics External Examiner

10. Member of staff withresponsibility for themodule

Dr AJ Boston Physics [email protected]

11. Module Moderator Dr P Cole Radiation Protection [email protected]

12. Other ContributingDepartments

13. Other Staff Teachingon this Module

14. Board of Studies Physics

15. Mode of Delivery Lectures/Tutorials

16. Location Main Liverpool City Campus

Lectures Seminars Tutorials Lab/Practicals Fieldwork/Placement Other TOTAL

17. ContactHours

28 4 20Project

52

18. Non-contact hours 9819. TOTAL HOURS 150

Lectures Seminars Tutorials Lab/Practicals Fieldwork/Placement Other

20. Timetable(if known)

21. Pre-requisites before taking this module (other modules and/or general educational/academic requirements):

PHYS136 or PHYS122

22. Modules for which this module is a pre-requisite:

None

23. Co-requisite modules:

None

24. Linked Modules:

25. Programme(s) (including Year of Study) to which this module is available on a mandatory basis:

26. Programme(s) (including Year of Study) to which this module is available on a required basis:

Programme(s) (including Year of Study) to which this module is available on a required basis:

F350 (3)

27. Programme(s) (including Year of Study) to which this module is available on an optional basis:

MODULE DESCRIPTION

28. Aims

To cover the basic physics principles of radiation therapy.To understand interactions with biological materials.To understand the need for modelling in radiobiological applications.To obtain a knowledge of electron transport.To construct a simple model of a radiation therapy application.

29. Learning Outcomes

At the end of the module students will:

have a basic knowledge of radiation transport and the interaction of radiation with biological tissue.understand the principles of radiotherapy and treatment planning.be familiar with biological modelling.have a basic understanding of beam modelling for radiotherapy treatment.understand the need for Monte Carlo modelling.have a knowledge of electron transport.have experience of modelling a simple radiotherapy application.

30. Teaching and Learning Strategies

See Department of Physics Undergraduate Student Handbook.

31. Syllabus

Introduction to radiation transport and the Boltzmann equation.Review of essential interaction physics, review of relevant basic probabilitytheory, dosimetry in healthcare applications.Outline of Radiotherapy modelling components, background to Radiotherapy.Simple radiobiological principles of radiotherapy, concept of treatment planning.General introduction to biological modelling, fractionation and treatment duringeffects, volume effects. Statistical techniques of biological model data fitting, datafits using real clinical normal tissue data, using model prediction data.Beam modeling for Radiotherapy treatment planning, lookup table approaches,convolution/pencil beam approaches.Monte Carlo Methods, requirements for random numbers, random numbergeneration, random sampling methods, scoring and tallies, error estimation,variance reduction techniques.Electron transport including optimisation.

32. Recommended Texts

None

ASSESSMENT

33. EXAM Duration Timing(Semester)

% of finalmark

Resit/resubmissionopportunity

Penalty for latesubmission

Notes

Written Examination 3 hours 2 80 August resit forPGT students only.Yr3 and Yr4students resit atthe next normalopportunity.

34. CONTINUOUS Duration Timing(Semester)

% of finalmark

Resit/resubmissionopportunity

Penalty for latesubmission

Notes

Page 66: ,'.'' ,'0''sdb/ModSpecs/2012/PHYSmod...Lec 15&16 Wk 9 Damped and Forced Harmonic Oscillator Resonance PC 8 Wk 9 Demonstration Experiment, Prediction and Writeup Lec 17&18 Wk 10 Gravitation

Planning and Runningof a Model of aRadiotherapyApplication

2 20 Only in exceptionalcircumstances

As universitypolicy

This work is notmarked anonymously MODULE SPECIFICATION

The information contained in this module specification was correct at the time of publication but may be subject tochange, either during the session because of unforeseen circumstances, or following review of the module at the end ofthe session. Queries about the module should be directed to the member of staff with responsibility for the module.

1. Module Title MEDICAL PHYSICS PROJECT

2. Module Code PHYS386

3. Year 201213

4. OriginatingDepartment

Physics

5. Faculty Fac of Science & Engineering

6. Semester Whole Session

7. Credit Level Level Three

8. Credit Value 30

9. External Examiner Physics External Examiner

10. Member of staff withresponsibility for themodule

Dr AJ Boston Physics [email protected]

11. Module Moderator Prof PJ Nolan Physics [email protected]

12. Other ContributingDepartments

13. Other Staff Teachingon this Module

Dr HC Boston Physics [email protected]

14. Board of Studies Physics

15. Mode of Delivery Project

16. Location Main Liverpool City Campus

Lectures Seminars Tutorials Lab/Practicals Fieldwork/Placement Other TOTAL

17. ContactHours

1 161 162

18. Non-contact hours 13819. TOTAL HOURS 300

Lectures Seminars Tutorials Lab/Practicals Fieldwork/Placement Other

20. Timetable(if known)

Research based project work

21. Pre-requisites before taking this module (other modules and/or general educational/academic requirements):

None

22. Modules for which this module is a pre-requisite:

None

23. Co-requisite modules:

None

24. Linked Modules:

25. Programme(s) (including Year of Study) to which this module is available on a mandatory basis:

26. Programme(s) (including Year of Study) to which this module is available on a required basis:

Page 67: ,'.'' ,'0''sdb/ModSpecs/2012/PHYSmod...Lec 15&16 Wk 9 Damped and Forced Harmonic Oscillator Resonance PC 8 Wk 9 Demonstration Experiment, Prediction and Writeup Lec 17&18 Wk 10 Gravitation

Programme(s) (including Year of Study) to which this module is available on a required basis:

F350 (3)

27. Programme(s) (including Year of Study) to which this module is available on an optional basis:

MODULE DESCRIPTION

28. Aims

To give students experience of working independently on an original problem related to medical physicsTo give students an opportunity to display the high quality of their workTo give students an opportunity to display qualities such as initiative and ingenuityTo improve students ability to keep daily records of the work in hand and its outcomesTo give students experience of report writing displaying high standards of composition and productionTo give an opportunity for students to display communication skills

29. Learning Outcomes

At the end of the module the student should have:

Experience of participation in planning all aspects of the workExperience researching literature and other sources of relevant informationExperience in different aspects of modern medical imaging techniques including Monte Carlo simulationsImproved skills and initiative in carrying out investigationsImproved ability to organise and manage timeImproved skills in making up a diary recording day by day progress of the projectImproved skills iin report writingImproved skills in preparing and delivering oral presentations

30. Teaching and Learning Strategies

A project outlined in general by a Supervisor will be assigned to the Student by the Module Organiser. In makinghis selections the Module Organiser generally attempts to choose projects which match each student's particularinterests but cannot guarantee to do so.

The student will keep a day by day diary showing the work done on and the progress of the project. Details of theproject aims will be decided in discussions between the student and the supervisor.

There will be regular scheduled meetings between the student and the supervisor to assess progress. At the endof the third week of the project, the student will produce a short written report which will specify the aims of theremainder of the project. This report must be filed in the Student Office.

The supervisor will advise the student when to finish and devote all remaining time to writing the Report andpreparing the Presentation.

The Presentation will be given in one of the scheduled sessions.

The Report and project diary will be handed in before the end of the twelfth week after the official start of theproject, or at any other time that may be officially announced.

A Risk Assessment must be completed by the supervisor when the use of specialist equipment, chemicals orradioactive sources are involved. This must be signed by the student and the supervisor.

31. Syllabus

The Physics with Medical Applications project will focus on aspects of Medical Imagingthree key areas:

Monte Carlo simulation of a radiation detector system using MCNPImage reconstruction of PET/SPECT data (FBP/MLEM)Practical project worth with PET/SPECT sensors

Some example projects for PHYS386:

"PET Imaging with Germanium Detectors"

The project will investigate the prospect of using highly segmented germanium detectordevices as a component of a Positron Emission Tomography (PET) scanner. The projectwill provide training in the experimental techniques required to extract energy, position

will provide training in the experimental techniques required to extract energy, positionand time information from a large volume semiconductor detector. The use of prototypedetectors will provide quantitative experimental data, which will enable conclusions to bedrawn regarding the position sensitivity possible with these new devices.

"SPECT Imaging with CdZnTe Detectors"

The aim of the project will be to investigate the prospect of using CdZnTe detectors todetect gamma-ray photons. The project will provide training in the experimentaltechniques required to extract energy and position information from such asemiconductor detector. You will be expected to collect and analyse experimental datafrom CdZnTe detectors and produce a report that details the prospects for using CdZnTeas part of a SPECT camera.

"Image Reconstruction of PET Data"

The aim of the project will be to investigate the algorithms that can be used toreconstruct computed tomography images. You will be expected to analyse experimentaldata from Germanium detector systems and produce a report that details the prospectsfor different algorithms as part of a Positron Emission Tomography (PET) camera.

32. Recommended Texts

None

ASSESSMENT

33. EXAM Duration Timing(Semester)

% of finalmark

Resit/resubmissionopportunity

Penalty for latesubmission

Notes

34. CONTINUOUS Duration Timing

(Semester)% of finalmark

Resit/resubmissionopportunity

Penalty for latesubmission

Notes

Project and Report 2 50 Only in exceptionalcircumstances

As universitypolicy

This work is notmarked anonymously

Report 2 30 Only in exceptionalcircumstances

As universitypolicy

This work is notmarked anonymously

Oral Presentation 15 mins 2 20 Only in exceptionalcircumstances

N/A asassessment istimetabled

Anonymous markingimpossible

Page 68: ,'.'' ,'0''sdb/ModSpecs/2012/PHYSmod...Lec 15&16 Wk 9 Damped and Forced Harmonic Oscillator Resonance PC 8 Wk 9 Demonstration Experiment, Prediction and Writeup Lec 17&18 Wk 10 Gravitation

MODULE SPECIFICATION

The information contained in this module specification was correct at the time of publication but may be subject tochange, either during the session because of unforeseen circumstances, or following review of the module at the end ofthe session. Queries about the module should be directed to the member of staff with responsibility for the module.

1. Module Title MATERIALS PHYSICS

2. Module Code PHYS387

3. Year 201213

4. OriginatingDepartment

Physics

5. Faculty Fac of Science & Engineering

6. Semester First Semester

7. Credit Level Level Three

8. Credit Value 7.5

9. External Examiner Physics External Examiner

10. Member of staff withresponsibility for themodule

Dr DS Martin Physics [email protected]

11. Module Moderator Prof P Weightman Physics [email protected]

12. Other ContributingDepartments

13. Other Staff Teachingon this Module

14. Board of Studies Physics

15. Mode of Delivery Lectures/Tutorials

16. Location Main Liverpool City Campus

Lectures Seminars Tutorials Lab/Practicals Fieldwork/Placement Other TOTAL

17. ContactHours

16 2 18

18. Non-contact hours 5719. TOTAL HOURS 75

Lectures Seminars Tutorials Lab/Practicals Fieldwork/Placement Other

20. Timetable(if known)

21. Pre-requisites before taking this module (other modules and/or general educational/academic requirements):

PHYS132 or equivalent

22. Modules for which this module is a pre-requisite:

None

23. Co-requisite modules:

None

24. Linked Modules:

25. Programme(s) (including Year of Study) to which this module is available on a mandatory basis:

26. Programme(s) (including Year of Study) to which this module is available on a required basis:

Programme(s) (including Year of Study) to which this module is available on a required basis:

F352 (3)

27. Programme(s) (including Year of Study) to which this module is available on an optional basis:

MODULE DESCRIPTION

28. Aims

To teach the properties and methods of preparation of a range of materials of scientific and technologicalimportanceTo develop an understanding of the experimental techniques of materials characterisationTo introduce materials such as amorphous solids, liquid crystals and polymers and to develop anunderstanding of the relationship between structure and physical properties for such materialsTo illustrate the concepts and principles by reference to examples

29. Learning Outcomes

At the end of the module the student should have:

An understanding of the atomic structure in cyrstalline and amorphous materialsKnowledge of the methods used for preparing single crystals and amorphous materialsKnowledge of the experimental techniques used in materials characterisationKnowledge of the physical properties of superconducting materialsAn appreciation of the factors involved in the design of biomaterialsThe ability to interpret simple phase diagrams of binary systems

30. Teaching and Learning Strategies

See Department of Physics Undergraduate Handbook

31. Syllabus

Fundamentals of Materials

States of matter, bonding between atoms, energy band structures of solids

Crystalline, polycrystalline, and amorphous solids

Bonding in crystals, crystal defects, amorphous solids, glasses and the glass transition,the preparation of amorphous materials

Methods of material characterisation

X-ray and electron diffraction: experimental methods and interpretation of data.Transmission electron microscopy. Scanning probe microscopy

Crystal growth

Mechanisms of crystal growth, scanning probe microscopy studies of crystal growth,methods for growing single crystals

Liquid crystals

Thermotropic mesophases, lyotropic mesophases, x-ray diffraction from liquid crystals,cell membranes, liquid crystal displays

Polymers

Molecular structures, amorphous and semi-crystalline polymers. Applications: plastics,elastomers, fibres

Biomaterials

Surface properties, biological response and biocompatibility, degradation of implants inbiological environments

Superconductors

Page 69: ,'.'' ,'0''sdb/ModSpecs/2012/PHYSmod...Lec 15&16 Wk 9 Damped and Forced Harmonic Oscillator Resonance PC 8 Wk 9 Demonstration Experiment, Prediction and Writeup Lec 17&18 Wk 10 Gravitation

Type I superconductors: Meissner effect, London equation, BCS theory. Basics of TypeII superconductors.

Semiconductors

The preparation of pure silicon, intrinsic and extrinsic semiconductors, amorphoussemiconductors. Epitaxial growth

32. Recommended Texts

"Materials Science and Engineering: An Introduction" (5th Edition) by W D Callister, published by Wiley

Background Reading

"The Physics of Solids" by R Turton, published by Oxford

"Introduction to Solid State Physics" (7th Edition) by C Kittel, published by Wiley

"Introduction to Liquid Crystals" by P Collings & M Hird, published by Taylor & Francis

ASSESSMENT

33. EXAM Duration Timing(Semester)

% of finalmark

Resit/resubmissionopportunity

Penalty for latesubmission

Notes

Written Examination 1 1/2hours

1 100 August resit forPGT students only.Yr3 and Yr4students resit atthe next normalopportunity.

34. CONTINUOUS Duration Timing(Semester)

% of finalmark

Resit/resubmissionopportunity

Penalty for latesubmission

Notes

MODULE SPECIFICATION

The information contained in this module specification was correct at the time of publication but may be subject tochange, either during the session because of unforeseen circumstances, or following review of the module at the end ofthe session. Queries about the module should be directed to the member of staff with responsibility for the module.

1. Module Title PHYSICS OF ENERGY SOURCES

2. Module Code PHYS388

3. Year 201213

4. OriginatingDepartment

Physics

5. Faculty Fac of Science & Engineering

6. Semester Second Semester

7. Credit Level Level Three

8. Credit Value 15

9. External Examiner Physics External Examiner

10. Member of staff withresponsibility for themodule

Dr J Coleman Physics [email protected]

11. Module Moderator Dr ES Paul Physics [email protected]

12. Other ContributingDepartments

13. Other Staff Teachingon this Module

Dr SJ Maxfield Physics [email protected]

14. Board of Studies Physics

15. Mode of Delivery Lectures/Tutorials

16. Location Main Liverpool City Campus

Lectures Seminars Tutorials Lab/Practicals Fieldwork/Placement Other TOTAL

17. ContactHours

32 4 36

18. Non-contact hours 11419. TOTAL HOURS 150

Lectures Seminars Tutorials Lab/Practicals Fieldwork/Placement Other

20. Timetable(if known)

21. Pre-requisites before taking this module (other modules and/or general educational/academic requirements):

PHYS122 (or equivalent)

22. Modules for which this module is a pre-requisite:

23. Co-requisite modules:

24. Linked Modules:

25. Programme(s) (including Year of Study) to which this module is available on a mandatory basis:

26. Programme(s) (including Year of Study) to which this module is available on a required basis:

F352 (3)

Page 70: ,'.'' ,'0''sdb/ModSpecs/2012/PHYSmod...Lec 15&16 Wk 9 Damped and Forced Harmonic Oscillator Resonance PC 8 Wk 9 Demonstration Experiment, Prediction and Writeup Lec 17&18 Wk 10 Gravitation

F352 (3)

27. Programme(s) (including Year of Study) to which this module is available on an optional basis:

MODULE DESCRIPTION

28. Aims

To develop an ability which allows educated and well informed opinions to be formed by the nextgeneration of physicists on a wide range of issues in the context of the future energy needs of manTo describe and understand methods of utilising renewable energy sources such as hydropower, tidalpower, wave power, wind power and solar power.To give knowledge and understanding of the design and operation of nuclear reactorsTo give knowledge and understanding of nuclear fusion as a source of powerTo give knowledge and understanding relevant to overall safety in the nuclear power industryTo describe the origin of environmental radioactivity and understand the effects of radiation on humans

29. Learning Outcomes

At the end of the module the student should have:

Learned the fundamental physical principles underlying energy production using renewable energysourcesLearned the fundamental physical principles underlying nuclear fission and fusion reactorsStudied the applications of these principles in the design issues power generationAn appreciation of the role of mathematics in modelling power generationLearned the fundamental physical principles concerning the origin and consequences of environmentalradioactivityDeveloped an awareness of the safety issues involved in exposure to radiationDeveloped problem solving skills based on the material presentedDeveloped an appreciation of the problems of supplying the required future energy needs and the scopeand issues associated with the different possible methods

30. Teaching and Learning Strategies

See Department of Physics Undergraduate Handbook

31. Syllabus

PHYS388 Introduction (1 Lecture)

Summary of global energy trends, energy consumption, global warming and CO2emission.

Basics of Nuclear Physics (3 Lectures)

Nuclear binding energy, nuclear reactions, cross sections. Interaction probability.Attenuation, mean free path. Radioactive decay (various forms), decay chains, secularequilibrium. Stability curve, neutrons and their interactions, fission - energy release,mass distribution, neutron emission.

Principles of Nuclear Fission Reactors (3 Lectures)

Chain reactions, reproduction constant, moderation, thermal reactors. Kinematics ofmoderators, neutron cycle in infinite reactors, energy production, consumption of 235U.Fast reactors, breeder reactors, breeder cycle.

Reactor Theory (3 Lectures)

Neutron diffusion theory and the diffusion equation. The reactor equation. Bucklingparameter. Boundary conditions and solutions of the reactor equation. Migration length.Improvements to the model. Boundary extrapolation.

Reactor Operations (2 Lectures)

Real reactors - layout, thermodynamics, Magnox, AGR, PWR and accelerator drivenfission. Operating characteristics, delayed neutrons, control systems, reactor kinematicsand reactor poisons.

Energy from Fusion (3 Lectures)

Energy from Fusion (3 Lectures)

Advantages over fission, thermonuclear approach, amplification factor, conditions forfusion. Energy production in a plasma, energy losses, break even temperature, Lawsoncondition. Magnetic confinement, tokomak, pinch effect, heating of plasma, presentstatus and outlook.

Radiation Issues (4 Lectures)

Interaction of radiation with matter, units, biological effects, radiation weighting factors.Effects on humans, calculation of doses, monitoring radiation. radiation protection.Shielding nuclear reactors. Reactor accidents. Radioactive fission products and theireffects. Sources of environmental radiation - decay chains of uranium and thorium -Radon - 40K - cosmic rays. Recommended limits above the natural level.

Thermodynamic and fluid dynamics background (2 Lectures)

The Greenhouse Effect. The thermal properties of water and steam. Carnot, Rankineand Brayton thermodynamic cycles. Geothermal power. Bernoulli's equation, Masscontinuity equation, Euler's turbine equation.

Hydropower, Tidal Power and Wave Power (3 Lectures)

Resources. Power output from a dam and flow rate using a weir. Turbines, theFourneyron turbine, impulse, efficiency. Tidal Power - Cause of tides estimate of tidalheight, Tidal waves c=(gh)1/2, Power from a tidal barrage, Tidal resonance - SevernBore, Economic and environmental effects. Wave Power - Wave energy derivations,Wave Power devices, Economics and Outlook.

Wind Power (3 Lectures)

Source of Wind Energy and Global Patterns. Modern Wind turbines. Kinetic Energy ofwind. Principles of horizontal axis wind turbine and maximum extraction efficiency. Bladedesign. Horizontal Wind Turbine Design and Fatigue. Turbine control and operation.Wind Characteristics. Power of a Wind Turbine. Wind farms and the environment.Economics and Outlook.

Solar Energy (3 Lectures)

Introduction - overall power - comparison. Solar Spectrum. Semiconductor review. Solarphotocells Efficiency. Commercial devices. Light trapping in multi-layers. Developingtechnologies. Solar panels. Economics, environmental outlook for photovoltaic cells.Solar thermal Power plants, Ocean conversion, Stirling engine, Solar Chimney.

Biomass (1 Lecture)

Basic concepts and examples. Economics and Outlook.

Energy and Society (1 Lecture)

Summary future needs, possible contributions from each source, issues associated witheach source.

32. Recommended Texts

"Energy Science Principles, technologies and impact" Andrews & Jelly, published by OUP

"Nuclear Physics - Principles and Applications" J Lilley, published by Wiley

Further Reading:

"Physics of the Environment" A W Brinkman, published by Imperial College Press

"The Elements of Nuclear Power" by D J Bennet and J R Thomson, 3rd edition, published by Longman

ASSESSMENT

33. EXAM Duration Timing(Semester)

% of finalmark

Resit/resubmissionopportunity

Penalty for latesubmission

Notes

Written Examination 3 hours 2 100 August resit for

Page 71: ,'.'' ,'0''sdb/ModSpecs/2012/PHYSmod...Lec 15&16 Wk 9 Damped and Forced Harmonic Oscillator Resonance PC 8 Wk 9 Demonstration Experiment, Prediction and Writeup Lec 17&18 Wk 10 Gravitation

PGT students only.Yr3 and Yr4students resit atthe next normalopportunity.

34. CONTINUOUS Duration Timing(Semester)

% of finalmark

Resit/resubmissionopportunity

Penalty for latesubmission

Notes

MODULE SPECIFICATION

The information contained in this module specification was correct at the time of publication but may be subject tochange, either during the session because of unforeseen circumstances, or following review of the module at the end ofthe session. Queries about the module should be directed to the member of staff with responsibility for the module.

1. Module Title SEMICONDUCTOR APPLICATIONS

2. Module Code PHYS389

3. Year 201213

4. OriginatingDepartment

Physics

5. Faculty Fac of Science & Engineering

6. Semester First Semester

7. Credit Level Level Three

8. Credit Value 7.5

9. External Examiner Physics External Examiner

10. Member of staff withresponsibility for themodule

Dr AJ Boston Physics [email protected]

11. Module Moderator Prof PJ Nolan Physics [email protected]

12. Other ContributingDepartments

13. Other Staff Teachingon this Module

14. Board of Studies Physics

15. Mode of Delivery Lectures/Tutorials

16. Location Main Liverpool City Campus

Lectures Seminars Tutorials Lab/Practicals Fieldwork/Placement Other TOTAL

17. ContactHours

16 2 18

18. Non-contact hours 5719. TOTAL HOURS 75

Lectures Seminars Tutorials Lab/Practicals Fieldwork/Placement Other

20. Timetable(if known)

21. Pre-requisites before taking this module (other modules and/or general educational/academic requirements):

PHYS132

22. Modules for which this module is a pre-requisite:

None

23. Co-requisite modules:

None

24. Linked Modules:

25. Programme(s) (including Year of Study) to which this module is available on a mandatory basis:

26. Programme(s) (including Year of Study) to which this module is available on a required basis:

Page 72: ,'.'' ,'0''sdb/ModSpecs/2012/PHYSmod...Lec 15&16 Wk 9 Damped and Forced Harmonic Oscillator Resonance PC 8 Wk 9 Demonstration Experiment, Prediction and Writeup Lec 17&18 Wk 10 Gravitation

Programme(s) (including Year of Study) to which this module is available on a required basis:

F352 (3)

27. Programme(s) (including Year of Study) to which this module is available on an optional basis:

MODULE DESCRIPTION

28. Aims

To develop the physics concepts describing semiconductors in sufficient details for the purpose ofunderstanding the construction and operation of common semiconductor devices

29. Learning Outcomes

At the end of the module the student should have:

Knowledge of the basic theory of p-n junctionsKnowledge of the structure and function of a variety of semiconductor devicesAn overview of semiconductor device manufacturing processesKnowledge of the basic processes involved in the interaction of radiation with matterUnderstanding the application of semiconductors in Nuclear and Particle physics

30. Teaching and Learning Strategies

See Department of Physics Undergraduate Handbook

31. Syllabus

PHYS389 The band structures of typical semiconductors. Crystal momentum and effectivemassTransport phenomena. Drift and diffusionThe p-n junction. Depletion layer width and capacitance. Current - voltagecharacteristicZener and avalanche breakdown in p-n junctionsThe physical principles of bipolar transistors(FET's), MOSFETs and MESFETSSemiconductor device manufactureThe absorption of light by semiconductorsNuclear radiation detectionRange of charged particlesGamma radiationSilicon and Germanium detectors

32. Recommended Texts

"Semiconductor Devices, Physics and Technology" by S M Sze, published by Wiley

ASSESSMENT

33. EXAM Duration Timing(Semester)

% of finalmark

Resit/resubmissionopportunity

Penalty for latesubmission

Notes

Written Examination 1 1/2hours

1 100 August resit forPGT students only.Yr3 and Yr4students resit atthe next normalopportunity.

34. CONTINUOUS Duration Timing(Semester)

% of finalmark

Resit/resubmissionopportunity

Penalty for latesubmission

Notes

MODULE SPECIFICATION

The information contained in this module specification was correct at the time of publication but may be subject tochange, either during the session because of unforeseen circumstances, or following review of the module at the end ofthe session. Queries about the module should be directed to the member of staff with responsibility for the module.

1. Module Title COMMUNICATING SCIENCE

2. Module Code PHYS391

3. Year 201213

4. OriginatingDepartment

Physics

5. Faculty Fac of Science & Engineering

6. Semester First Semester

7. Credit Level Level Three

8. Credit Value 7.5

9. External Examiner Physics External Examiner

10. Member of staff withresponsibility for themodule

Dr L Moran Physics [email protected]

11. Module Moderator Dr TG Shears Physics [email protected]

12. Other ContributingDepartments

13. Other Staff Teachingon this Module

14. Board of Studies Physics

15. Mode of Delivery Workshops

16. Location Main Liverpool City Campus

Lectures Seminars Tutorials Lab/Practicals Fieldwork/Placement Other TOTAL

17. ContactHours

31Workshop sessions

31

18. Non-contact hours 4419. TOTAL HOURS 75

Lectures Seminars Tutorials Lab/Practicals Fieldwork/Placement Other

20. Timetable(if known)

Workshops

21. Pre-requisites before taking this module (other modules and/or general educational/academic requirements):

Completion of Year 2 Science Programme

22. Modules for which this module is a pre-requisite:

PHYS396

23. Co-requisite modules:

None

24. Linked Modules:

25. Programme(s) (including Year of Study) to which this module is available on a mandatory basis:

26. Programme(s) (including Year of Study) to which this module is available on a required basis:

Page 73: ,'.'' ,'0''sdb/ModSpecs/2012/PHYSmod...Lec 15&16 Wk 9 Damped and Forced Harmonic Oscillator Resonance PC 8 Wk 9 Demonstration Experiment, Prediction and Writeup Lec 17&18 Wk 10 Gravitation

Programme(s) (including Year of Study) to which this module is available on a required basis:

27. Programme(s) (including Year of Study) to which this module is available on an optional basis:

MODULE DESCRIPTION

28. Aims

To improve science students' skills in communicating scientific information in a wide range of contextsTo develop students' understanding of some concepts of:

Science in generalTheir particular area of scienceOther areas of science

29. Learning Outcomes

At the end of the module the student should have:

An ability to communicate more confidentlyAn understanding of some of the key factors in successful communicationAn appreciation of the needs of different audiencesExperience of a variety of written and oral mediaA broader appreciation of science and particular areas of science

30. Teaching and Learning Strategies

The learning and teaching strategy is essentially one of Problem Based Learning in the context of 4communication situations. In each case the students will have three-hour workshop sessions, including anintroductory talk, exercises, discussion and production of Aims, Objectives and Evaluation Criteria for theparticular situation. Four scenarios/case studies will be developed for which the students will prepare andpresent solutions in a seminar setting, where their input in the discussion is assessed. The students will then givetheir presentations in another session (including written material) and receive constructive evaluation from eachother and the tutor. Literature review techniques will be developed in workshop sessions to support the casestudies. This will be supported by use of patchwork text for reflection on learning.

31. Syllabus

The four communication situations will be:-

1. Undergraduate (Level 1) lecture in student's own discipline.2. Group business presentation based on results of research completed by the

group.3. Research talk to scientists (based on departmental research).4. Group presentation about science to a non-specialist audience.

32. Recommended Texts

None

ASSESSMENT

33. EXAM Duration Timing(Semester)

% of finalmark

Resit/resubmissionopportunity

Penalty for latesubmission

Notes

34. CONTINUOUS Duration Timing

(Semester)% of finalmark

Resit/resubmissionopportunity

Penalty for latesubmission

Notes

Written reports 1 25 None As UniversityPolicy

Oral Presentation &seminar contribution

1 50 None N/A asassessment istimetabled

Group work 1 15 None N/A asassessment is

assessment istimetabled

Patchwork Text(reflecting on learning)

1 10 None As UniversityPolicy

Page 74: ,'.'' ,'0''sdb/ModSpecs/2012/PHYSmod...Lec 15&16 Wk 9 Damped and Forced Harmonic Oscillator Resonance PC 8 Wk 9 Demonstration Experiment, Prediction and Writeup Lec 17&18 Wk 10 Gravitation

MODULE SPECIFICATION

The information contained in this module specification was correct at the time of publication but may be subject tochange, either during the session because of unforeseen circumstances, or following review of the module at theend of the session. Queries about the module should be directed to the member of staff with responsibility for themodule.

1. Module Title STATISTICS IN DATA ANALYSIS

2. Module Code PHYS392

3. Year 201213

4. OriginatingDepartment

Physics

5. Faculty Fac of Science & Engineering

6. Semester First Semester

7. Credit Level Level Three

8. Credit Value 15

9. External Examiner Physics External Examiner

10. Member of staff withresponsibility for themodule

Dr SJ Maxfield Physics [email protected]

11. Module Moderator Dr AJ Boston Physics [email protected]

12. Other ContributingDepartments

13. Other Staff Teachingon this Module

Dr D Newton Physics [email protected]

14. Board of Studies Physics

15. Mode of Delivery Lectures/Workshops

16. Location Main Liverpool City Campus

Lectures Seminars Tutorials Lab/Practicals Fieldwork/Placement Other TOTAL

17. ContactHours

12 36Workshop sessions

48

18. Non-contact hours 10219. TOTAL HOURS 150

Lectures Seminars Tutorials Lab/Practicals Fieldwork/Placement Other

20. Timetable(if known)

21. Pre-requisites before taking this module (other modules and/or general educational/academic requirements):

None

22. Modules for which this module is a pre-requisite:

None

23. Co-requisite modules:

None

24. Linked Modules:

25. Programme(s) (including Year of Study) to which this module is available on a mandatory basis:

26. Programme(s) (including Year of Study) to which this module is available on a required basis:

F390 (3)

27. Programme(s) (including Year of Study) to which this module is available on an optional basis:

F3F5 (3)

MODULE DESCRIPTION

28. Aims

To give a theoretical and practical understanding of the statistical principles involved in the analysis andinterpretation of data.

29. Learning Outcomes

Knowledge of experimental errors and probability distributionsThe ability to use statistical methods in data analysisThe ability to apply statistical analysis to data from a range of sourcesUsing statistical information to detemine the validity of a hypothesis or experimental measurement

30. Teaching and Learning Strategies

There will be 12 lectures covering the statistical principles and mathematical background.

There will be workshop sessions each week (36 hours) to work on statistical problems.

The students will be give a research topic for the statistical assignment close to their degree subject (NuclearScience or Astrophysics) to carry out a statistical analysis.

See Departmental Handbook for further infromation

31. Syllabus

Experimental errors; random and systematic errors; distributions, mean, variance;combining errors. Probability and Satistics: probability, rules of probability; statistics.Distributions; Binomial, Poisson, Gaussian, Error Matrix. Parameter Fitting; leastsquares, hypothesis testing; chi2 analysis t-test. Monte Carlo Methods; introduction,simple examples. Quality assurance: introduction, simple examples.

32. Recommended Texts

To be decided

ASSESSMENT

33. EXAM Duration Timing(Semester)

% of finalmark

Resit/resubmissionopportunity

Penalty for latesubmission

Notes

Written Examination 1.5 hours 1 50 August resitfor PGT studentsonly. Yr3 and Yr4students resit atthe next normalopportunity.

34. CONTINUOUS Duration Timing(Semester)

% of finalmark

Resit/resubmissionopportunity

Penalty for latesubmission

Notes

Workshops duringmodule

36 1 30 Only in exceptionalcircumstances

As universitypolicy

This work is notmarkedanonymously

Statistics assignment 30 1 20 Only in exceptional As university

Page 75: ,'.'' ,'0''sdb/ModSpecs/2012/PHYSmod...Lec 15&16 Wk 9 Damped and Forced Harmonic Oscillator Resonance PC 8 Wk 9 Demonstration Experiment, Prediction and Writeup Lec 17&18 Wk 10 Gravitation

circumstances policy MODULE SPECIFICATION

The information contained in this module specification was correct at the time of publication but may be subject tochange, either during the session because of unforeseen circumstances, or following review of the module at the end ofthe session. Queries about the module should be directed to the member of staff with responsibility for the module.

1. Module Title STATISTICAL AND LOW TEMPERATURE PHYSICS

2. Module Code PHYS393

3. Year 201213

4. OriginatingDepartment

Physics

5. Faculty Fac of Science & Engineering

6. Semester First Semester

7. Credit Level Level Three

8. Credit Value 15

9. External Examiner Physics External Examiner

10. Member of staff withresponsibility for themodule

Dr KM Hock Physics [email protected]

11. Module Moderator Dr S Burdin Physics [email protected]

12. Other ContributingDepartments

13. Other Staff Teachingon this Module

14. Board of Studies Physics

15. Mode of Delivery Lectures/Tutorials

16. Location Main Liverpool City Campus

Lectures Seminars Tutorials Lab/Practicals Fieldwork/Placement Other TOTAL

17. ContactHours

32 4 36

18. Non-contact hours 11419. TOTAL HOURS 150

Lectures Seminars Tutorials Lab/Practicals Fieldwork/Placement Other

20. Timetable(if known)

21. Pre-requisites before taking this module (other modules and/or general educational/academic requirements):

PHYS253 and PHYS255

22. Modules for which this module is a pre-requisite:

None

23. Co-requisite modules:

None

24. Linked Modules:

25. Programme(s) (including Year of Study) to which this module is available on a mandatory basis:

26. Programme(s) (including Year of Study) to which this module is available on a required basis:

Page 76: ,'.'' ,'0''sdb/ModSpecs/2012/PHYSmod...Lec 15&16 Wk 9 Damped and Forced Harmonic Oscillator Resonance PC 8 Wk 9 Demonstration Experiment, Prediction and Writeup Lec 17&18 Wk 10 Gravitation

Programme(s) (including Year of Study) to which this module is available on a required basis:

F303 (3 or 4)

27. Programme(s) (including Year of Study) to which this module is available on an optional basis:

MODULE DESCRIPTION

28. Aims

To build on material presented in earlier Thermal Physics and Quantum Mechanics coursesTo develop the statistical treatment of quantum systemsTo use theoretical techniques to predict experimental observablesTo introduce the basic principles governing the behaviour of liquid helium and superconductors in coolingtechniques

29. Learning Outcomes

At the end of the module the student should have:

Understanding of the statistical basis of entropy and temperatureAbility to devise expressions for observables, (heat capacity, magnetisation) from statistical treatment ofquantum systemsUnderstanding of Maxwell Boltzmann, Fermi-Dirac and Bose Einstein gasesKnowledge of cooling techniquesKnowledge and understanding of basic theories of liquid helium behaviour and superconductivity incooling techniques

30. Teaching and Learning Strategies

Lectures to define the material, tutorials linked to lecture material to reinforce the quantitative aspects of thetopics covered.

31. Syllabus

PHYS393 Basic ideas, macrostate, microstates, averaging, distributions, statistical entropyDistinguishable particles, statistical definition of temperatureBoltzmann distribution, partition functionCalculation of thermodynamic functionsSpin 1/2 solid, localised harmonic oscillatorsGasesStates in boxes, example He gasIdentical particles - fermions and bosonsMicrostates for gas - Fermi Dirac, Bose Einstein, Maxwell Boltzmann distributionsMaxwell Boltzmann gases - speed distributionDiatomic gases - heat capacity. Heat capacity of H2.Fermi Dirac gases. Aplication to metals, He3.Bose Einstein gases. Application to He4, photons, phononsCooling techniques - liquefaction of gases, Joule Kelvin effect, Liquefiers. 3Hedilution refrigerator, Adiabatic demagnetisation, Nuclear demagnetisationLiquid He4 - superfluid he4. Two fluid model theories of He IILiquid He3. Experiment - ideasSuperconductivity. Normal conductivity, basic properties of superconductors:Phenomenological models, two fluid model, London theory; Deductions forexperiment. BCS theory; Recent developments - high Tc superconductors

32. Recommended Texts

Statistical Mechanics - A Survival GuideA. M. Glazer and J. S. WarkOxford University Press, 2001(available as ebook in Liverpool University library).

Basic Superfluids Tony GuenaultTaylor and Francis Inc., 2003(available as ebook in Liverpool University library).

Frank PobellMatter and Methods at Low Temperatures.Springer; 2nd edition,2002.[Chapters 1, 5, 7 and 9](available as ebook in Liverpool University library)

ASSESSMENT

33. EXAM Duration Timing(Semester)

% of finalmark

Resit/resubmissionopportunity

Penalty for latesubmission

Notes

Written Examination 3 hours 1 80 August resit forPGT students only.Yr3 and Yr4students resit atthe next normalopportunity.

34. CONTINUOUS Duration Timing(Semester)

% of finalmark

Resit/resubmissionopportunity

Penalty for latesubmission

Notes

4 x TutorialAssignments

4 x 3hours

1 20 Only in exceptionalcircumstances

As universitypolicy

Page 77: ,'.'' ,'0''sdb/ModSpecs/2012/PHYSmod...Lec 15&16 Wk 9 Damped and Forced Harmonic Oscillator Resonance PC 8 Wk 9 Demonstration Experiment, Prediction and Writeup Lec 17&18 Wk 10 Gravitation

MODULE SPECIFICATION

The information contained in this module specification was correct at the time of publication but may be subject tochange, either during the session because of unforeseen circumstances, or following review of the module at the end ofthe session. Queries about the module should be directed to the member of staff with responsibility for the module.

1. Module Title OBSERVATIONAL ASTRONOMY

2. Module Code PHYS394

3. Year 201213

4. OriginatingDepartment

Physics

5. Faculty Fac of Science & Engineering

6. Semester First Semester

7. Credit Level Level Three

8. Credit Value 15

9. External Examiner Physics External Examiner

10. Member of staff withresponsibility for themodule

Dr MJ Darnley Physics [email protected]

11. Module Moderator Dr AM Newsam Physics [email protected]

12. Other ContributingDepartments

13. Other Staff Teachingon this Module

Dr IK Baldry Physics [email protected] SD Barrett Physics [email protected]

14. Board of Studies Physics

15. Mode of Delivery Fieldwork

16. Location Off Campus

Lectures Seminars Tutorials Lab/Practicals Fieldwork/Placement Other TOTAL

17. ContactHours

84A combination of supervisedpractical work using thetelescope and relatedequipment, and bothsupervised and un-superviseddata analysis work

12Classes tohelp/aid with theanalysis ofastronomicaldata followingthe field trip

96

18. Non-contact hours 5419. TOTAL HOURS 150

Lectures Seminars Tutorials Lab/Practicals Fieldwork/Placement Other

20. Timetable(if known)

Field trip to IzanaObservatory, Tenerife, Spain,in May/June between Year 2and Year 3

Classes to help with datareduction and projectreports - Year 3 semester1

21. Pre-requisites before taking this module (other modules and/or general educational/academic requirements):

PHYS251 and PHYS252

22. Modules for which this module is a pre-requisite:

None

23. Co-requisite modules:

None

24. Linked Modules:

25. Programme(s) (including Year of Study) to which this module is available on a mandatory basis:

26. Programme(s) (including Year of Study) to which this module is available on a required basis:

27. Programme(s) (including Year of Study) to which this module is available on an optional basis:

F3F5 (3) F521 (3)

MODULE DESCRIPTION

28. Aims

To provide practice in the planning and execution of a programme of astronomical observationsTo provide training in the application of astronomical co-ordinate systemsTo provide competence in the handling of a large astronomical telescopeTo gain experience in making, calibrating and analysing astronomical measurements using a CCDcamera and spectrometerTo gain experience in preparing a written report based on the results of astronomical work

29. Learning Outcomes

At the end of the module the student should have:

The ability to plan and execute a simple programme of astronomical observations and measurementsFamiliarity with astronomical coordinate systems and the ability to find astronomical objects in the skySkills in pointing and adjusting a large, manually controlled astronomical telescopeThe ability to take, reduce and analyse astronomical data to produce physically meaningful information.Experience of observing at a professional high-altitude observatoryExperience of preparing a written report based on the results of astronomical work

30. Teaching and Learning Strategies

The module takes the form of a week-long field trip to the Mons 50-cm Telescope at the Izana Observatory inTenerife. Students are split into teams of three or four and learn to locate objects in the sky using positionalastronomy. They then learn how to point the telescope by hand and how to anticipate the transit of objectsthrough the field of view. Students begin by identifying bright stars in the sky to find with the telescope. They thencalibrate the telescope pointing and use this calibration to find objects not visible with the naked eye. A set ofoptical transmission filters are calibrated using standard stars and quantitative measurements made, using aCCD camera, of, e.g. planetary nebulae and star clusters. The latter measurements are used to construct aHertzprung-Russell diagram. Observations of variable stars are made to obtain the light curve and then imagesand spectra are taken of objects such as faint galaxies. Students keep individual project log books which areassessed at the end of the week. Participation, teamwork and individual initiative are also assessed. Followingtheir return, students must produce a written report on an aspect of their work.

31. Syllabus

1 The planning and execution of a programme of astronomical observationsThe application of astronomical co-ordinate systemsThe handling and pointing of a large astronomical telescopeMaking, calibrating and analysing astronomical measurements using a CCDcamera and spectrometerKeeping an experimental log book

32. Recommended Texts

"Astrophysical Techniques", C.R. Kitchen, Institute of Physics

Further Reading: PHYS252 lecture notes

ASSESSMENT

Page 78: ,'.'' ,'0''sdb/ModSpecs/2012/PHYSmod...Lec 15&16 Wk 9 Damped and Forced Harmonic Oscillator Resonance PC 8 Wk 9 Demonstration Experiment, Prediction and Writeup Lec 17&18 Wk 10 Gravitation

33. EXAM Duration Timing(Semester)

% of finalmark

Resit/resubmissionopportunity

Penalty for latesubmission

Notes

34. CONTINUOUS Duration Timing

(Semester)% of finalmark

Resit/resubmissionopportunity

Penalty for latesubmission

Notes

Field Work One week 3 (ofsecondyear)

60 N/A N/A This work is notmarked anonymously

Lab Books One week 3 (ofsecondyear)

10 N/A As universitypolicy

This work is notmarked anonymously

Project Report 1 30 Only in exceptionalcircumstances

As universitypolicy

This work is notmarked anonymously

MODULE SPECIFICATION

The information contained in this module specification was correct at the time of publication but may be subject tochange, either during the session because of unforeseen circumstances, or following review of the module at the end ofthe session. Queries about the module should be directed to the member of staff with responsibility for the module.

1. Module Title APPLIED PHYSICS PROJECT

2. Module Code PHYS395

3. Year 201213

4. OriginatingDepartment

Physics

5. Faculty Fac of Science & Engineering

6. Semester Second Semester

7. Credit Level Level Three

8. Credit Value 15

9. External Examiner Physics External Examiner

10. Member of staff withresponsibility for themodule

Prof P Weightman Physics [email protected]

11. Module Moderator Dr U Klein Physics [email protected]

12. Other ContributingDepartments

13. Other Staff Teachingon this Module

14. Board of Studies Physics

15. Mode of Delivery Project

16. Location Main Liverpool City Campus

Lectures Seminars Tutorials Lab/Practicals Fieldwork/Placement Other TOTAL

17. ContactHours

1The module beginswith a lectureexplaining the structureof the team project

11The sessionis anobservedmeeting ofthe projectteam oncea week 1Assessment

13

18. Non-contact hours 13719. TOTAL HOURS 150

Lectures Seminars Tutorials Lab/Practicals Fieldwork/Placement Other

20. Timetable(if known)

21. Pre-requisites before taking this module (other modules and/or general educational/academic requirements):

Completion of Year 2 of a Physics UG programme

22. Modules for which this module is a pre-requisite:

None

23. Co-requisite modules:

Page 79: ,'.'' ,'0''sdb/ModSpecs/2012/PHYSmod...Lec 15&16 Wk 9 Damped and Forced Harmonic Oscillator Resonance PC 8 Wk 9 Demonstration Experiment, Prediction and Writeup Lec 17&18 Wk 10 Gravitation

None

24. Linked Modules:

25. Programme(s) (including Year of Study) to which this module is available on a mandatory basis:

26. Programme(s) (including Year of Study) to which this module is available on a required basis:

27. Programme(s) (including Year of Study) to which this module is available on an optional basis:

F3F5 (3) F300 (3)

MODULE DESCRIPTION

28. Aims

The aims of the module are

To give students an insight into applied researchTo help students gain a better understanding of the needs of industry and the opportunities available tothem as physicistsTo give students experience in team work and project managementTo encourage self-assessmentTo improve communication with clients and with research collaborators

29. Learning Outcomes

At the end of the module the student should have the ability to

Plan a research projectWork in a team to carryout a research projectObtain information, evaluate its relevance, write a scientific report and present a poster covering therelevant materialCollaborate to satisfy a client's requirements

30. Teaching and Learning Strategies

By participating in a team project with industrial focus the students will learn the importance of communication,cooperation and reliability. They will also have an opportunity to develop imaginative solutions to problems and totest them out on a real problem.

The problem is specified by the external sponsor. The team of students will then discuss their approach tosolving the problem and decide who is going to tackle the various aspects of the problem. The group meetsregularly (weekly) with the academic supervisor, who offers advice and may suggest approaches to tackling theproblem.

At the end of the project the team writes a group report which is assessed by the academic supervisor, a secondsupervisor and the external sponsor. An individual's contribution to the project is assessed by the academicsupervisor. The team presents a poster which is assessed by academics and the external sponsor.

31. Syllabus

The project is an exercise in working within a team structure to devise and report on asolution to a simulated problem. The solution will require the application of physics.

Groups will be of three or four students with an academic observer. Formal meetings willbe held to discuss approaches to the problem, assigning of individual tasks and co-ordinating the writing of the report.

32. Recommended Texts

ASSESSMENT

33. EXAM Duration Timing % of Resit/resubmission Penalty for late Notes

(Semester) finalmark

opportunity submission

34. CONTINUOUS Duration Timing

(Semester)% of finalmark

Resit/resubmissionopportunity

Penalty for latesubmission

Notes

Project Team Report ~10,000words

2 30 Only in exceptionalcircumstances

As universitypolicy

This work is notmarkedanonymously. It ismarked by theacademic supervisor,a second academicsupervisor and anexternal sponsor. Thethree marks countequally. If any markdiffers substantiallyfrom the other twothen a moderationprocess is applied.The same mark isgiven to each studentin the team.

Individual Contributionto Team Project

2 30 Only in exceptionalcircumstances

N/A This is not markedanonymously. Thismark is an evaluationof the student'scontribution to theteam project from theteam project reportand from observationof team meetings bythe academicsupervisor.

Individual Student Log 2 30 Only in exceptionalcircumstances

N/A This work is notmarkedanonymously. Thismark is from theindividual project logassessed by theacademic supervisorand a secondsupervisor. If the twosupervisors' marksdiffer substantiallythen a moderationprocess is applied.This is the lastassessment of thestudent.

Team PosterPresentation

1 hour 2 10 Only in exceptionalcircumstances

N/A asassessment istimetabled

This work is notmarkedanonymously. Theposter is marked byacademics andexternal sponsors ofthis and other teamprojects. The samemark is given to eachstudent in the team.

Page 80: ,'.'' ,'0''sdb/ModSpecs/2012/PHYSmod...Lec 15&16 Wk 9 Damped and Forced Harmonic Oscillator Resonance PC 8 Wk 9 Demonstration Experiment, Prediction and Writeup Lec 17&18 Wk 10 Gravitation

MODULE SPECIFICATION

The information contained in this module specification was correct at the time of publication but may be subject tochange, either during the session because of unforeseen circumstances, or following review of the module at the end ofthe session. Queries about the module should be directed to the member of staff with responsibility for the module.

1. Module Title UNDERGRADUATE AMBASSADORS PROJECT

2. Module Code PHYS396

3. Year 201213

4. OriginatingDepartment

Physics

5. Faculty Fac of Science & Engineering

6. Semester Second Semester

7. Credit Level Level Three

8. Credit Value 15

9. External Examiner Physics External Examiner

10. Member of staff withresponsibility for themodule

Dr L Moran Physics [email protected]

11. Module Moderator Prof P Weightman Physics [email protected]

12. Other ContributingDepartments

13. Other Staff Teachingon this Module

14. Board of Studies Physics

15. Mode of Delivery Work Place Learning

16. Location Main Liverpool City Campus

Lectures Seminars Tutorials Lab/Practicals Fieldwork/Placement Other TOTAL

17. ContactHours

10Initial training at University ledby module leader + fortnightlyseminar on current progress

30School Placement

40

18. Non-contact hours 11019. TOTAL HOURS 150

Lectures Seminars Tutorials Lab/Practicals Fieldwork/Placement Other

20. Timetable(if known)

21. Pre-requisites before taking this module (other modules and/or general educational/academic requirements):

Completion of Year 2 of a Physics UG programme

22. Modules for which this module is a pre-requisite:

None

23. Co-requisite modules:

PHY391

24. Linked Modules:

25. Programme(s) (including Year of Study) to which this module is available on a mandatory basis:

26. Programme(s) (including Year of Study) to which this module is available on a required basis:

27. Programme(s) (including Year of Study) to which this module is available on an optional basis:

F300 (3) F3F5 (3)

Students must pass an interview with module leader and Ogden Science Officer to be accepted on this module.Completion of PHYS241 Communicating Science desirable, or student has alternate training/experience. Criteriafor Acceptance: Student displays genuine interest in school environment. Student can commit to visit schoolevery week, be punctual, appropriately dressed and well prepared.

MODULE DESCRIPTION

28. Aims

To provide undergraduates with key transferable skills.To provide students with opportunity to learn to communicate physics at different levels.To provide students with work-place experience.To provide students with the opportunity to work with staff in a different environment with differentpriorities to the University.To provide teaching experience that encourages undergraduates to consider a career in teaching.To supply role models for secondary school students.To provide support and teaching assistance to secondary school teachers.To encourage a new generation of physicists.

29. Learning Outcomes

By the end of the module the student will be able to

Communicate physics effectively to othersPlan a lessonDesign a worksheetEvaluate their planningAssess the effectiveness of a session or worksheet that they have designedPrioritise their workManage small groups of pupils (e.g. to complete an experiment)

30. Teaching and Learning Strategies

The project is an exercise in working within a work-place environment. The student will work closely with one ormore teachers with whom they will meet regularly to discuss their progress and ideas for lessons. The studentwill design sections of (or entire) lessons on which they will receive feedback from the teacher before and afterthey have delivered the lesson.

Once accepted at interview, the student will undergo a full day of training at the University prior to attending theschool. This training will cover the structure of the module (including details of assessment), and an introductionto communication and organisation skills.

The students will spend 1 school day (3-4 hours) per week in school for 8-10 weeks. At the school the student isexpected to progress from observation to assisting in the classroom to delivering in part and full lessons. Aweekly log must be completed.

The student will have a seminar (~1 hour) with their supervisor once per fortnight either individually or in a group,and be observed in the classroom by their supervisor.

The student will also complete a ‘Special Project’ which can, but is not limited to, be a set of lessons, a set ofworksheets, a website, or other which is implemented and evaluated. Outcomes should be evaluated anddiscussed in their presentation and final report.

31. Syllabus

The project is an exercise in working within a work-place environment. The student willwork closely with one or more teachers with whom they will meet regularly to discusstheir progress and ideas for lessons. The student will design sections of (or entire)lessons on which they will receive feedback from the teacher before and after they havedelivered the lesson.

Page 81: ,'.'' ,'0''sdb/ModSpecs/2012/PHYSmod...Lec 15&16 Wk 9 Damped and Forced Harmonic Oscillator Resonance PC 8 Wk 9 Demonstration Experiment, Prediction and Writeup Lec 17&18 Wk 10 Gravitation

Their Special Project requires them to develop, implement and evaluate a project withsupport from their tutor at the fortnightly meetings and their teacher.

32. Recommended Texts

Students will be directed to appropriate research articles

ASSESSMENT

33. EXAM Duration Timing(Semester)

% of finalmark

Resit/resubmissionopportunity

Penalty for latesubmission

Notes

34. CONTINUOUS Duration Timing

(Semester)% of finalmark

Resit/resubmissionopportunity

Penalty for latesubmission

Notes

Reflective Journal(similar to log book forprojects)

2 30 Only inExceptionalCircumstances

As universitypolicy

This work is notmarkedanonymously. Thismark is from theindividual project logassessed by theacademic supervisorand a secondsupervisor. If the twosupervisors' marksdiffer substantiallythen a moderationprocess is applied.

Performance inSchool as evidencedby feedback fromTeacher (moderatedby supervisor)

2 10 Only inExceptionalCircumstances

N/A This work is notmarkedanonymously. Theteacher’s report onthe student’sprogress will beassessed by theacademic supervisorwith respect to thelearning criteria of themodule (in particulardevelopment oftransferable skills anddevelopment of abilityto communicatephysics effectively).

Oral Presentation:The content shouldindicate where andhow the student hasdeveloped in terms ofthe learning outcomeswith particularreference to theirSpecial Project.

2 30 Only inExceptionalCircumstances

As universitypolicy

This work is notmarkedanonymously. Thepresentation will takeplace in front of agroup of academicstaff and otherstudents.

Written Report: Thecontent shouldindicate where andhow the student hasdeveloped in terms ofthe learning outcomeswith particularreference to theirSpecial Project.

~7,500words

2 30 Only inExceptionalCircumstances

As universitypolicy

This work is notmarkedanonymously. It ismarked by theacademic supervisorand a secondacademic supervisor.The two marks countequally. This is thelast assessment ofthe student.

MODULE SPECIFICATION

The information contained in this module specification was correct at the time of publication but may be subject tochange, either during the session because of unforeseen circumstances, or following review of the module at the end ofthe session. Queries about the module should be directed to the member of staff with responsibility for the module.

1. Module Title NUCLEAR SCIENCE PROJECT

2. Module Code PHYS398

3. Year 201213

4. OriginatingDepartment

Physics

5. Faculty Fac of Science & Engineering

6. Semester Whole Session

7. Credit Level Level Three

8. Credit Value 30

9. External Examiner Physics External Examiner

10. Member of staff withresponsibility for themodule

Prof PJ Nolan Physics [email protected]

11. Module Moderator Dr AJ Boston Physics [email protected]

12. Other ContributingDepartments

13. Other Staff Teachingon this Module

Dr HC Boston Physics [email protected]

14. Board of Studies Physics

15. Mode of Delivery Project

16. Location Main Liverpool City Campus

Lectures Seminars Tutorials Lab/Practicals Fieldwork/Placement Other TOTAL

17. ContactHours

1 161 162

18. Non-contact hours 13819. TOTAL HOURS 300

Lectures Seminars Tutorials Lab/Practicals Fieldwork/Placement Other

20. Timetable(if known)

Research based project work

21. Pre-requisites before taking this module (other modules and/or general educational/academic requirements):

None

22. Modules for which this module is a pre-requisite:

None

23. Co-requisite modules:

None

24. Linked Modules:

25. Programme(s) (including Year of Study) to which this module is available on a mandatory basis:

26. Programme(s) (including Year of Study) to which this module is available on a required basis:

Page 82: ,'.'' ,'0''sdb/ModSpecs/2012/PHYSmod...Lec 15&16 Wk 9 Damped and Forced Harmonic Oscillator Resonance PC 8 Wk 9 Demonstration Experiment, Prediction and Writeup Lec 17&18 Wk 10 Gravitation

Programme(s) (including Year of Study) to which this module is available on a required basis:

F390 (3)

27. Programme(s) (including Year of Study) to which this module is available on an optional basis:

MODULE DESCRIPTION

28. Aims

To give students experience of working independently on an original problem related to nuclear scienceTo give students an opportunity to display the high quality of their workTo give students an opportunity to display qualities such as initiative and ingenuityTo improve students ability to keep daily records of the work in hand and its outcomesTo give students experience of report writing displaying high standards of composition and productionTo give an opportunity for students to display communication skills

29. Learning Outcomes

At the end of the module the student should have:

Experience of participation in planning all aspects of the workExperience researching literature and other sources of relevant informationExperience in different aspects of modern medical imaging techniques including Monte Carlo simulationsImproved skills and initiative in carrying out investigationsImproved ability to organise and manage timeImproved skills in making up a diary recording day by day progress of the projectImproved skills iin report writingImproved skills in preparing and delivering oral presentations

30. Teaching and Learning Strategies

A project outlined in general by a Supervisor will be assigned to the Student by the Module Organiser. In makinghis selections the Module Organiser generally attempts to choose projects which match each student's particularinterests but cannot guarantee to do so.

The student will keep a day by day diary showing the work done on and the progress of the project. Details of theproject aims will be decided in discussions between the student and the supervisor.

There will be regular scheduled meetings between the student and the supervisor to assess progress. At the endof the third week of the project, the student will produce a short written report which will specify the aims of theremainder of the project. This report must be filed in the Student Office.

The supervisor will advise the student when to finish and devote all remaining time to writing the Report andpreparing the Presentation.

The Presentation will be given in one of the scheduled sessions.

The Report and project diary will be handed in before the end of the twelfth week after the official start of theproject, or at any other time that may be officially announced.

A Risk Assessment must be completed by the supervisor when the use of specialist equipment, chemicals orradioactive sources are involved. This must be signed by the student and the supervisor.

31. Syllabus

The Nuclear Science project will focus on three key areas:

Monte Carlo simulation of a radiation detector system using MCNPExperimental measurement using research standard instrumentsAnalysis of data from experiment and simulation

Some example projects for PHYS398:

"Gamma ray emissions measured with Germanium Detectors"

The project will use high resolution germanium gamma ray detectors to investigateradioactivity in environmental samples. This will allow the isotopes to be identified andtheir quantity measured. The performance of the measurement system will beunderstood using simualtions. Results will be compaered to those found in earlier

understood using simualtions. Results will be compaered to those found in earlierstudies.

"Neutron dose rates and shielding"

The aim of the project will be to investigate the dose rates clsoe to a neutron source andthen to investigate the effectiveness of materials such as polythene and boratedpolythene as moderators. The systems will be simualted ising MCNP in order to fullyunderstand thier behaviour.

32. Recommended Texts

None

ASSESSMENT

33. EXAM Duration Timing(Semester)

% of finalmark

Resit/resubmissionopportunity

Penalty for latesubmission

Notes

34. CONTINUOUS Duration Timing

(Semester)% of finalmark

Resit/resubmissionopportunity

Penalty for latesubmission

Notes

Project and Report 2 50 Only in exceptionalcircumstances

As universitypolicy

This work is notmarked anonymously

Report 2 30 Only in exceptionalcircumstances

As universitypolicy

This work is notmarked anonymously

Oral Presentation 15 mins 2 20 Only in exceptionalcircumstances

N/A asassessment istimetabled

Anonymous markingimpossible

Page 83: ,'.'' ,'0''sdb/ModSpecs/2012/PHYSmod...Lec 15&16 Wk 9 Damped and Forced Harmonic Oscillator Resonance PC 8 Wk 9 Demonstration Experiment, Prediction and Writeup Lec 17&18 Wk 10 Gravitation

MODULE SPECIFICATION

The information contained in this module specification was correct at the time of publication but may be subject tochange, either during the session because of unforeseen circumstances, or following review of the module at the end ofthe session. Queries about the module should be directed to the member of staff with responsibility for the module.

1. Module Title ADVANCED PRACTICAL PHYSICS (MPHYS)

2. Module Code PHYS478

3. Year 201213

4. OriginatingDepartment

Physics

5. Faculty Fac of Science & Engineering

6. Semester First Semester

7. Credit Level M Level

8. Credit Value 15

9. External Examiner Physics External Examiner

10. Member of staff withresponsibility for themodule

Dr DS Martin Physics [email protected]

11. Module Moderator Prof CA Lucas Physics [email protected]

12. Other ContributingDepartments

13. Other Staff Teachingon this Module

Dr P Rowlands Physics [email protected] R Herzberg Physics [email protected] A Mehta Physics [email protected] PJ Nolan Physics [email protected] J Kretzschmar Physics [email protected]

14. Board of Studies Physics

15. Mode of Delivery Practicals

16. Location Main Liverpool City Campus

Lectures Seminars Tutorials Lab/Practicals Fieldwork/Placement Other TOTAL

17. ContactHours

108 108

18. Non-contact hours 4219. TOTAL HOURS 150

Lectures Seminars Tutorials Lab/Practicals Fieldwork/Placement Other

20. Timetable(if known)

Tuesday 10:00-17:00 and Wednesday10:00-13:00, CTL

21. Pre-requisites before taking this module (other modules and/or general educational/academic requirements):

PHYS111 or equivalent

22. Modules for which this module is a pre-requisite:

None

23. Co-requisite modules:

None

24. Linked Modules:

25. Programme(s) (including Year of Study) to which this module is available on a mandatory basis:

26. Programme(s) (including Year of Study) to which this module is available on a required basis:

F303 (3)

27. Programme(s) (including Year of Study) to which this module is available on an optional basis:

MODULE DESCRIPTION

28. Aims

To give further training in laboratory techniques, in the use of computer packages for modelling andanalysis, and in the use of modern instrumentsTo develop the students' independent judgement in performing physics experimentsTo encourage students to research aspects of physics complementary to material met in lectures andtutorialsTo consolidate the students ability to produce good quality work against realistic deadlines

29. Learning Outcomes

At the end of the module the student should have:

Experience of taking physics data with modern equipmentKnowledge of some experimental techniques not met in previous laboratory practiceImproved skills in researching published papers and articles as source materialsDeveloped a personal responsibility for assuring that data taken is of a high qualityIncreased skills in data taking and error analysisIncreased skills in reporting experiments and an appreciation of the factors needed to produce clear andcomplete reportsImproved skills in the time management and organisation of their experimental procedures to meetdeadlinesExperience working as an individual and in small groups

30. Teaching and Learning Strategies

See Department of Physics Undergraduate Handbook

31. Syllabus

Students carry out experiments in three 4-week blocks:

Block A Radiation Detection

Three experiment concerning the detection of both beta and gamma radiation fromradioactive sources, some of which are from samples that have been activated by asource of thermal neutrons.

Block B X-Ray Diffraction

Group work on computer modelling to simulate x-ray diffraction from crystals followed byexperiments to determine the crystal structures and lattice constants of two unknownmaterials

Block C Quanta and Waves

Group work followed by two individual experiments on the explanation of quantum and/orwave phenomena

32. Recommended Texts

None

ASSESSMENT

33. EXAM Duration Timing % of Resit/resubmission Penalty for late Notes

Page 84: ,'.'' ,'0''sdb/ModSpecs/2012/PHYSmod...Lec 15&16 Wk 9 Damped and Forced Harmonic Oscillator Resonance PC 8 Wk 9 Demonstration Experiment, Prediction and Writeup Lec 17&18 Wk 10 Gravitation

(Semester) finalmark

opportunity submission

34. CONTINUOUS Duration Timing

(Semester)% of finalmark

Resit/resubmissionopportunity

Penalty for latesubmission

Notes

Experimental reports(including group work)

1 90 Only in exceptionalcircumstances

As universitypolicy

Experimental reportsare markedanonymously

Laboratory Diary 1 10 Only in exceptionalcircumstances

As universitypolicy

This work is notmarked anonymously

MODULE SPECIFICATION

The information contained in this module specification was correct at the time of publication but may be subject tochange, either during the session because of unforeseen circumstances, or following review of the module at the end ofthe session. Queries about the module should be directed to the member of staff with responsibility for the module.

1. Module Title ADVANCED QUANTUM PHYSICS

2. Module Code PHYS480

3. Year 201213

4. OriginatingDepartment

Physics

5. Faculty Fac of Science & Engineering

6. Semester First Semester

7. Credit Level M Level

8. Credit Value 15

9. External Examiner Physics External Examiner

10. Member of staff withresponsibility for themodule

Prof PA Butler Physics [email protected]

11. Module Moderator Prof M Klein Physics [email protected]

12. Other ContributingDepartments

13. Other Staff Teachingon this Module

Dr JH Vossebeld Physics [email protected]

14. Board of Studies Physics

15. Mode of Delivery Lectures/Tutorials/Practicals

16. Location Main Liverpool City Campus

Lectures Seminars Tutorials Lab/Practicals Fieldwork/Placement Other TOTAL

17. ContactHours

32 4 36

18. Non-contact hours 11419. TOTAL HOURS 150

Lectures Seminars Tutorials Lab/Practicals Fieldwork/Placement Other

20. Timetable(if known)

21. Pre-requisites before taking this module (other modules and/or general educational/academic requirements):

PHYS361 or equivalent

22. Modules for which this module is a pre-requisite:

23. Co-requisite modules:

24. Linked Modules:

25. Programme(s) (including Year of Study) to which this module is available on a mandatory basis:

26. Programme(s) (including Year of Study) to which this module is available on a required basis:

F303 (4)

Page 85: ,'.'' ,'0''sdb/ModSpecs/2012/PHYSmod...Lec 15&16 Wk 9 Damped and Forced Harmonic Oscillator Resonance PC 8 Wk 9 Demonstration Experiment, Prediction and Writeup Lec 17&18 Wk 10 Gravitation

F303 (4)

27. Programme(s) (including Year of Study) to which this module is available on an optional basis:

F521 (4)

MODULE DESCRIPTION

28. Aims

To build on Semester 1 module on Quantum Mechanics and Atomic Physics with the intention ofproviding breadth and depth in the understanding of the commonly used aspects of Quantum mechanics.To develop an understanding of the ideas of perturbation calculations and of Fermi's Golden Rule.To develop an understanding of the techniques used to describe the scattering of particles.To demonstrate creation and annihilation operators using the harmonic oscillator as an example.To develop skills which enable numerical calculation of real physical quantum problem.To encourage enquiry into the philosophy of quantum theory including its explanation of classicalmechanics.

29. Learning Outcomes

At the end of the module the student should have:

Understanding of variational tehcniques.Understanding of perturbation techniques.Understanding of transition matrix elements.Understanding of phase space factors.Understanding of partial wave techniques.Ability to compute wave functions and transition probabilities using several software packages.

30. Teaching and Learning Strategies

See Department of Physics Undergraduate Handbook.

31. Syllabus

PHYS480 General level of treatment that of Mandl "Quantum Mechanics". problems classes will beorganised to use computer packages to solve quantum problems (modelling wavefunctions etc).

Operator formalism and Direc notation.

Bound state perturbation theory, non-degenerate and degenrate.

Variational methods.

Time dependent Schrodinger equation.

Time dependent perturbation theory, Fermi's Golden Rule.

Emission and absorption of radiation, phase space.

Scattering theory - time dependent approach; potential scattering, Born approximation,scattering by screened Coulomb potential, electron-atom scattering.

Scattering - time independent approach; scattering amplitude, integral equation,scattering of identical particles, partial waves, phase shifts.

Harmonic Oscillator solved using creation and annihilation operators.

Discussion of quantum philosophy, quantum mechanics contains classical mechanics.

32. Recommended Texts

"Quantum Mechanics" by F Mandl, published by Wiley

ASSESSMENT

33. EXAM Duration Timing(Semester)

% of finalmark

Resit/resubmissionopportunity

Penalty for latesubmission

Notes

Written Examination 3 hours 1 100 August resitfor PGT studentsonly. Yr3 and Yr4students resit atthe next normalopportunity.

34. CONTINUOUS Duration Timing(Semester)

% of finalmark

Resit/resubmissionopportunity

Penalty for latesubmission

Notes

Page 86: ,'.'' ,'0''sdb/ModSpecs/2012/PHYSmod...Lec 15&16 Wk 9 Damped and Forced Harmonic Oscillator Resonance PC 8 Wk 9 Demonstration Experiment, Prediction and Writeup Lec 17&18 Wk 10 Gravitation

MODULE SPECIFICATION

The information contained in this module specification was correct at the time of publication but may be subject tochange, either during the session because of unforeseen circumstances, or following review of the module at the end ofthe session. Queries about the module should be directed to the member of staff with responsibility for the module.

1. Module Title ACCELERATOR PHYSICS

2. Module Code PHYS481

3. Year 201213

4. OriginatingDepartment

Physics

5. Faculty Fac of Science & Engineering

6. Semester First Semester

7. Credit Level M Level

8. Credit Value 7.5

9. External Examiner Physics External Examiner

10. Member of staff withresponsibility for themodule

Prof CP Welsch Physics [email protected]

11. Module Moderator Dr A Wolski Physics [email protected]

12. Other ContributingDepartments

13. Other Staff Teachingon this Module

14. Board of Studies Physics

15. Mode of Delivery Lectures/Tutorials

16. Location Main Liverpool City Campus

Lectures Seminars Tutorials Lab/Practicals Fieldwork/Placement Other TOTAL

17. ContactHours

14 2 2 18

18. Non-contact hours 5719. TOTAL HOURS 75

Lectures Seminars Tutorials Lab/Practicals Fieldwork/Placement Other

20. Timetable(if known)

21. Pre-requisites before taking this module (other modules and/or general educational/academic requirements):

PHYS370 or equivalent.

22. Modules for which this module is a pre-requisite:

None

23. Co-requisite modules:

None

24. Linked Modules:

25. Programme(s) (including Year of Study) to which this module is available on a mandatory basis:

26. Programme(s) (including Year of Study) to which this module is available on a required basis:

Programme(s) (including Year of Study) to which this module is available on a required basis:

27. Programme(s) (including Year of Study) to which this module is available on an optional basis:

F303 (4) F521 (4)

MODULE DESCRIPTION

28. Aims

To build on modules on electricity, magnetism and waves;To study the functional principle of different types of particle accelerators;To study the generation of ion and electron beams;To study the layout and the design of simple ion and electron optics;To study basic concepts in radio frequency engineering and technology.

29. Learning Outcomes

At the end of the module the student should have:

An understanding of the description of the motion of charged particles in complex electromagnetic fields;An understanding of different types of accelerators, in which energy range and for which purposes theyare utilised;An understanding of the generation and technical exploitation of synchrotron radiation;An understanding of the concept and the necessity of beam cooling.

30. Teaching and Learning Strategies

See Department of Physics Undergraduate Handbook

31. Syllabus

1 1. Introduction, History of Particle Accelerators, Experiments. (1 lecture)

2. General Concepts, Introduction to the physics of particle sources. Physics ofplasmas, electron sources, ion sources. (2 lectures)

3. Motion of charged particles in electric and magnetic fields, transverse beammotion, Hill's equation, representation of different ion optical elements by a matrixformalism. (2 lectures)

4. Linear Accelerators: Alvarez and Wideroe structures, the radio frequencyquadrupole. (2 lectures)

5. Rf Cavity Design: Important parameters, field distribution in different cavity types,mode characterization, visualization of fields. (2 lectures)

6. Ring Accelerators: Introduction to the Betatron, Microtron, Cyclotron, andSynchrotron. (4 lectures)

7. Medical Accelerators: General concepts, benefits, different accelerator concepts.(2 lectures)

8. Overview of accelerator facilities world-wide. (1 lecture)

32. Recommended Texts

1. Grant and Philips, Electrodynamics.2. A. Sessler und E. Wilson, Engines of Discovery: A Century of Particle Accelerators (Introduction and

History)3. E. Wilson, An Introduction to Particle Accelerators.4. S. Y. Lee, Accelerator Physics. World Scientific (1999).5. H. Wiedemann, Particle Accelerator Physics I & II.6. CERN Yellow Reports (online resource)

ASSESSMENT

33. EXAM Duration Timing % of Resit/resubmission Penalty for late Notes

Page 87: ,'.'' ,'0''sdb/ModSpecs/2012/PHYSmod...Lec 15&16 Wk 9 Damped and Forced Harmonic Oscillator Resonance PC 8 Wk 9 Demonstration Experiment, Prediction and Writeup Lec 17&18 Wk 10 Gravitation

(Semester) finalmark

opportunity submission

Written Examination 1 1/2hours

1 70 August resitfor PGT studentsonly. Yr3 and Yr4students resit atthe next normalopportunity.

34. CONTINUOUS Duration Timing(Semester)

% of finalmark

Resit/resubmissionopportunity

Penalty for latesubmission

Notes

Poster Presentation 1 15 Only in exceptionalcircumstances

As universitypolicy

This work is notmarked anonymously

Assessed ProblemSet

1 15 Only in exceptionalcircumstances

As universitypolicy

This work is notmarked anonymously

MODULE SPECIFICATION

The information contained in this module specification was correct at the time of publication but may be subject tochange, either during the session because of unforeseen circumstances, or following review of the module at the end ofthe session. Queries about the module should be directed to the member of staff with responsibility for the module.

1. Module Title ELEMENTS OF STELLAR DYNAMICS

2. Module Code PHYS484

3. Year 201213

4. OriginatingDepartment

Physics

5. Faculty Fac of Science & Engineering

6. Semester First Semester

7. Credit Level M Level

8. Credit Value 7.5

9. External Examiner Physics external examiner

10. Member of staff withresponsibility for themodule

Dr W Maciejewski Physics [email protected]

11. Module Moderator Prof C Mundell Physics

12. Other ContributingDepartments

13. Other Staff Teachingon this Module

14. Board of Studies Physics

15. Mode of Delivery Lectures/Tutorials

16. Location Main Liverpool City Campus

Lectures Seminars Tutorials Lab/Practicals Fieldwork/Placement Other TOTAL

17. ContactHours

15 3 18

18. Non-contact hours 5719. TOTAL HOURS 75

Lectures Seminars Tutorials Lab/Practicals Fieldwork/Placement Other

20. Timetable(if known)

21. Pre-requisites before taking this module (other modules and/or general educational/academic requirements):

Completion of Year 2 of a Physics UG programme

22. Modules for which this module is a pre-requisite:

23. Co-requisite modules:

24. Linked Modules:

25. Programme(s) (including Year of Study) to which this module is available on a mandatory basis:

26. Programme(s) (including Year of Study) to which this module is available on a required basis:

Page 88: ,'.'' ,'0''sdb/ModSpecs/2012/PHYSmod...Lec 15&16 Wk 9 Damped and Forced Harmonic Oscillator Resonance PC 8 Wk 9 Demonstration Experiment, Prediction and Writeup Lec 17&18 Wk 10 Gravitation

27. Programme(s) (including Year of Study) to which this module is available on an optional basis:

F303 (3) F521 (3) F521 (4) F303 (4)

MODULE DESCRIPTION

28. Aims

To show that there is more to gravity than Newton's law. This will provide the students with a basicunderstanding of the dynamics of systems containing millions and billions of point-like gravitating bodies: stars instellar clusters and galaxies.

29. Learning Outcomes

At the end of the module the student should have the ability to

Show how dynamical processes shape the structure of galaxies and stellar clustersDescribe the motion of stars in stellar systemsApply orbital analysis to stellar systemsDemonstrate an understanding of the implications of the continuity equation

30. Teaching and Learning Strategies

The course material specified in the syllabus will be covered in lectures.

Problems classes will provide students with the opportunity to confirm their understanding of the materialcovered in the lectures.

31. Syllabus

Introduction: collisionless and collisional stellar systems

Relaxation time. Describing motion of 100 billion stars in a galaxy and 100 thousandstars in a Globular Cluster.

Stellar orbits in gravitational potentials

Newton's law applied to distributed mass. Newton's theorems for spherical systems.Potential of a disk. Circular velocity. Escape speed. Elements of Lagrangian formalism.Orbits in spherically symmetric, axisymmetric and elongated potentials. Keplerianpotential. Integrals of the motion.

Continuity equation applied to an ensemble of stars

Phase-space. Distribution function as phase-space density. The collisionless Boltzmannequation. The Jeans theorem. Isothermal sphere. The Jeans equations. Velocityellipsoid. Encounters in collisional systems. Thermodynamics of collisional systems:negative heat capacity. Evolution of Globular Clusters.

Essential dynamical aspects of elliptical and spiral galaxies.

Tensor virial theorem. Random motions and rotation in elliptical galaxies. Spiral structurein disc galaxies. Density waves. Stability of discs.

Encounters of galaxies

Dynamical friction. Violent relaxation. Phase mixing.

32. Recommended Texts

Recommended: "Galaxies in the Universe: An Introduction", L.S. Sparke and J.S. Gallagher, III, 2nd edition,CUP

Optional: "Galactic Dynamics", J. Binney and S. Tremaine, 2nd edition, Princeton University Press

ASSESSMENT

33. EXAM Duration Timing(Semester)

% of finalmark

Resit/resubmissionopportunity

Penalty for latesubmission

Notes

Written examination 1.5 hour 1 75 August resit forPGT students only.Yr3 and Yr4students resit atthe next normalopportunity.

34. CONTINUOUS Duration Timing(Semester)

% of finalmark

Resit/resubmissionopportunity

Penalty for latesubmission

Notes

Problems set inProblems Classes

3 x 1hours

1 25 August resit forPGT students only.Yr3 and Yr4students resit atthe next normalopportunity.

As universitypolicy

This work is notmarked anonymously

Page 89: ,'.'' ,'0''sdb/ModSpecs/2012/PHYSmod...Lec 15&16 Wk 9 Damped and Forced Harmonic Oscillator Resonance PC 8 Wk 9 Demonstration Experiment, Prediction and Writeup Lec 17&18 Wk 10 Gravitation

MODULE SPECIFICATION

The information contained in this module specification was correct at the time of publication but may be subject tochange, either during the session because of unforeseen circumstances, or following review of the module at the end ofthe session. Queries about the module should be directed to the member of staff with responsibility for the module.

1. Module Title PHYSICS OF THE RADIATIVE UNIVERSE

2. Module Code PHYS485

3. Year 201213

4. OriginatingDepartment

Physics

5. Faculty Fac of Science & Engineering

6. Semester Second Semester

7. Credit Level M Level

8. Credit Value 15

9. External Examiner Physics external examiner

10. Member of staff withresponsibility for themodule

Dr D Bersier Physics [email protected]

11. Module Moderator Dr S Kobayashi Physics [email protected]

12. Other ContributingDepartments

13. Other Staff Teachingon this Module

Dr C Simpson Physics [email protected]

14. Board of Studies Physics

15. Mode of Delivery Lectures/Tutorials/Practicals

16. Location Main Liverpool City Campus

Lectures Seminars Tutorials Lab/Practicals Fieldwork/Placement Other TOTAL

17. ContactHours

28 4 4 36

18. Non-contact hours 11419. TOTAL HOURS 150

Lectures Seminars Tutorials Lab/Practicals Fieldwork/Placement Other

20. Timetable(if known)

21. Pre-requisites before taking this module (other modules and/or general educational/academic requirements):

Completion of Year 2 of a Physics UG programme

22. Modules for which this module is a pre-requisite:

23. Co-requisite modules:

24. Linked Modules:

25. Programme(s) (including Year of Study) to which this module is available on a mandatory basis:

26. Programme(s) (including Year of Study) to which this module is available on a required basis:

27. Programme(s) (including Year of Study) to which this module is available on an optional basis:

F521 (4) F303 (4) F521 (3) F303 (3)

MODULE DESCRIPTION

28. Aims

This module will look at some of the many ways that matter and radiation interact, in relativistic and non-relativistic physical contexts. The aims of the module are

To see how physical phenomena can be applied and used to explain the appearance and spectra ofcelestial objectsTo provide an astrophysical context for statistical mechanicsTo introduce Einstein's A and B coefficientsTo introduce collisional excitation coefficientsTo demonstrate how emission line ratios inform on physical properties

29. Learning Outcomes

At the end of the module the student should have the ability to

Relate observable quantitites to physical conditions and mechanism(s)Describe and calculate the emergent flux and spectrum for several mechanisms: Bremsstrahlung,synchrotron and Compton effectApply this knowledge to understand the properties and behaviour of different objects (active galaxies,neutron stars, gamma-ray bursts, H II regions)Describe key astrophysical line ratiosDescribe the meaning of an ionization parameterProvide input to and understand the output of the computer code CLOUDY

30. Teaching and Learning Strategies

Teaching will be delivered in a manner that encourages participation and critical thinking from students. They willbe expected to have read the material in advance. Lecture time will be used to answer students queries, expandon important concepts and show worked examples. Tutorials will cover students' attempts at problems. Part ofthe assessment is in the form of computer-based exercises using existing software (CLOUDY). This allows thecalculation of a complete spectrum for various types of objects, thereby gaining a much better understanding ofthe parameters affecting the spectrum. Analytical calculations will be carried out in lectures or as exercises.

31. Syllabus

Refresher Radiative transfer equation, blackbody radiation, special relativity,electrodynamics, statistical mechanics (partition function, Maxwell-Boltzmanndistribution)

Continuum emission Radiation emitted by moving charges; Thomson scatteringBremsstrahlung radiation; emitted spectrumRelativistic Doppler effect; aberration; jets in astrophysicsSuperluminal motionSynchrotron radiation; emitted power and spectrum; curvature radiationCompton scattering and inverse Compton effect

Line emission Einstein A and B coefficientsCollisional excitation and de-excitationTemperature- and density-sensitive line ratiosIonisation balance, Saha equationStromgren spheresDetailed analysis of emission line spectra using CLOUDY

32. Recommended Texts

Strongly recommended:

H. Bradt: Astrophysics Processes (CUP)

D. Osterbrock & G Ferland: Astrophysics of gaseous nebulae and Active Galactic Nuclei (2nd ed)

Page 90: ,'.'' ,'0''sdb/ModSpecs/2012/PHYSmod...Lec 15&16 Wk 9 Damped and Forced Harmonic Oscillator Resonance PC 8 Wk 9 Demonstration Experiment, Prediction and Writeup Lec 17&18 Wk 10 Gravitation

Optional:

F. Shu: The Physics of astrophysics. I. Radiation (University science books)

G. Rybicki & A. Lightman: Radiative processes in Astrophysics (Wiley)

ASSESSMENT

33. EXAM Duration Timing(Semester)

% of finalmark

Resit/resubmissionopportunity

Penalty for latesubmission

Notes

Written examination 3 hours 2 80 August resit forPGT students only.Yr3 and Yr4students resit atthe next normalopportunity.

34. CONTINUOUS Duration Timing(Semester)

% of finalmark

Resit/resubmissionopportunity

Penalty for latesubmission

Notes

Computer modellingexercises

6 hours 2 20 August resit forPGT students only.Yr3 and Yr4students resit atthe next normalopportunity.

As universitypolicy

This work is notmarkedanonymously. Theduration is nominally2 x 2 hours in thecomputing laboratoryplus 2 hours ofprivate study.

MODULE SPECIFICATION

The information contained in this module specification was correct at the time of publication but may be subject tochange, either during the session because of unforeseen circumstances, or following review of the module at the end ofthe session. Queries about the module should be directed to the member of staff with responsibility for the module.

1. Module Title MODELLING PHYSICAL PHENOMENA

2. Module Code PHYS488

3. Year 201213

4. OriginatingDepartment

Physics

5. Faculty Fac of Science & Engineering

6. Semester Second Semester

7. Credit Level M Level

8. Credit Value 15

9. External Examiner Physics External Examiner

10. Member of staff withresponsibility for themodule

Dr JH Vossebeld Physics [email protected]

11. Module Moderator Dr AJ Boston Physics [email protected]

12. Other ContributingDepartments

13. Other Staff Teachingon this Module

Dr BT King Physics [email protected]

14. Board of Studies Physics

15. Mode of Delivery Lectures/Practical

16. Location Main Liverpool City Campus

Lectures Seminars Tutorials Lab/Practicals Fieldwork/Placement Other TOTAL

17. ContactHours

7 101 108

18. Non-contact hours 4219. TOTAL HOURS 150

Lectures Seminars Tutorials Lab/Practicals Fieldwork/Placement Other

20. Timetable(if known)

21. Pre-requisites before taking this module (other modules and/or general educational/academic requirements):

None

22. Modules for which this module is a pre-requisite:

None

23. Co-requisite modules:

None

24. Linked Modules:

25. Programme(s) (including Year of Study) to which this module is available on a mandatory basis:

26. Programme(s) (including Year of Study) to which this module is available on a required basis:

Page 91: ,'.'' ,'0''sdb/ModSpecs/2012/PHYSmod...Lec 15&16 Wk 9 Damped and Forced Harmonic Oscillator Resonance PC 8 Wk 9 Demonstration Experiment, Prediction and Writeup Lec 17&18 Wk 10 Gravitation

Programme(s) (including Year of Study) to which this module is available on a required basis:

F521 (3) F303 (3)

27. Programme(s) (including Year of Study) to which this module is available on an optional basis:

MODULE DESCRIPTION

28. Aims

To give students experience of working independently and in small groups on an original problem.To give students an opportunity to display the high quality of their work.To give students an opportunity to display qualities such as initiative and ingenuity.To introduce students to concepts, methods and applicability of computational modelling of physicalphenomena using the Java language.To give students experience of report writing displaying high standards of composition and production.To give an opportunity for students to display communication skills.

29. Learning Outcomes

At the end of the module the student should have:

Acquired working knowledge of a high level OO programming language.Experience in researching literature and other sources of relevant information.Set up model of physical phenomena or situation.Experience in testing model against data from experiment or literature.Improved ability to organise and manage time.Improved skills in report writing.Improved skills in explaining project under questioning.

30. Teaching and Learning Strategies

See Department of Physics Undergraduate Handbook.

31. Syllabus

A project outlined in general by a Supervisor will be assigned to the student by theModule Organiser, who attempts to choose projects which match each student'sparticular interests but cannot guarantee to do so.

The student will attend weekly sessions on programming and related matters asarranged by the Module Organiser.

Details of the project aims will be decided in discussions between the student and thesupervisor.

There will be regular scheduled meetings between the student and the supervisor toassess progress.

The student will hand in set work as required, which will be marked and used as oneelement in assessing students' diligence.

The supervisor will advise the student when to finish and devote all remaining time towriting the Report and preparing the Presentation.

The Presentation will be given in one of the scheduled sessions, normally in Week 11 ofSemester 2.

The Report will normally be handed in before the end of Week 12 of Semester 2.

A project diary must be kept and handed in with reports as part of the assessment.

32. Recommended Texts

None

ASSESSMENT

33. EXAM Duration Timing % of Resit/resubmission Penalty for late Notes

(Semester) finalmark

opportunity submission

34. CONTINUOUS Duration Timing

(Semester)% of finalmark

Resit/resubmissionopportunity

Penalty for latesubmission

Notes

Individual ProjectReport (2Supervisors)

2 30 Only in exceptionalcircumstances

As universitypolicy

This work is notmarked anonymously

Group Project Report(2 SecondAcademics)

2 20 Only in exceptionalcircumstances

As universitypolicy

This work is notmarked anonymously

Six Weekly Exercises 2 30 Only in exceptionalcircumstances

As universitypolicy

This work is notmarked anonymously

Oral Presentation 2 20 Only in exceptionalcircumstances

N/A asassessment istimetabled

Anonymous markingimpossible

Page 92: ,'.'' ,'0''sdb/ModSpecs/2012/PHYSmod...Lec 15&16 Wk 9 Damped and Forced Harmonic Oscillator Resonance PC 8 Wk 9 Demonstration Experiment, Prediction and Writeup Lec 17&18 Wk 10 Gravitation

MODULE SPECIFICATION

The information contained in this module specification was correct at the time of publication but may be subject tochange, either during the session because of unforeseen circumstances, or following review of the module at the end ofthe session. Queries about the module should be directed to the member of staff with responsibility for the module.

1. Module Title ADVANCED NUCLEAR PHYSICS

2. Module Code PHYS490

3. Year 201213

4. OriginatingDepartment

Physics

5. Faculty Fac of Science & Engineering

6. Semester Second Semester

7. Credit Level M Level

8. Credit Value 7.5

9. External Examiner Physics External Examiner

10. Member of staff withresponsibility for themodule

Dr M Chartier Physics [email protected]

11. Module Moderator Prof R Herzberg Physics [email protected]

12. Other ContributingDepartments

13. Other Staff Teachingon this Module

14. Board of Studies Physics

15. Mode of Delivery Lectures/Tutorials

16. Location Main Liverpool City Campus

Lectures Seminars Tutorials Lab/Practicals Fieldwork/Placement Other TOTAL

17. ContactHours

16 2 18

18. Non-contact hours 5719. TOTAL HOURS 75

Lectures Seminars Tutorials Lab/Practicals Fieldwork/Placement Other

20. Timetable(if known)

21. Pre-requisites before taking this module (other modules and/or general educational/academic requirements):

PHYS375

22. Modules for which this module is a pre-requisite:

None

23. Co-requisite modules:

None

24. Linked Modules:

25. Programme(s) (including Year of Study) to which this module is available on a mandatory basis:

26. Programme(s) (including Year of Study) to which this module is available on a required basis:

Programme(s) (including Year of Study) to which this module is available on a required basis:

27. Programme(s) (including Year of Study) to which this module is available on an optional basis:

F303 (4) F521 (4)

MODULE DESCRIPTION

28. Aims

To build on the year 3 modules on Nuclear PhysicsTo offer an insight into current ideas about the description of atomic nuclei and nuclear matter

29. Learning Outcomes

At the end of the module the student should have:

Knowledge of the basic properties of nuclear forces and the experimental evidence upon which these arebasedBasic knowledge of the factors governing nuclear shapesUnderstanding of the origin of pairing forces and the effect of these and rotational forces on nuclearbehaviourAn overview of phenomena observed for exotic nuclei far from the line of nuclear stabilityBasic knowledge of astrophysical nucleosynthesis processesBasic knowledge of phases of nuclear matter

30. Teaching and Learning Strategies

See the Department of Physics Undergraduate Handbook

31. Syllabus

Nuclear Physics

Nucleon-Nucleon Force: spin and isospin, general properties of force, one pionexchange potential, the deuteron, range of nuclear forceNuclear Behaviour: mirror nuclei, independent particle modelForms of Mean Potential: square well, harmonic oscillator, spin-orbit coupling,Woods-Saxon, residual interaction, Hartree-FockNuclear Deformation: geometric descriptoins, Nilsson model, large deformationsHybrid Models: deformed liquid drop, Strutinsky method, fission isomersNuclear Excitations: spherical nuclei, vibrations, rotations of a deformed systemRotating Systems: moment of inertia, cranking model, backbendingNuclei at Extremes of Spin: high lx bands, high K bands, superdeformation,shape coexistenceNuclei at Extremes of Isospin: N=Z nuclei, exotic nuclei, dripline nuclei,superheavies, halo nucleiNuclear Astrophysics: elemental abundances, origin of the elementsPhases of nuclear matter

32. Recommended Texts

Nuclear Physics:

"Introductory Nuclear Physics" K S Krane, published by John Wiley & Sons

Further Reading:

"Basic Ideas and Concepts in Nuclear Physics" K Heyde, published by IOP

ASSESSMENT

33. EXAM Duration Timing(Semester)

% of finalmark

Resit/resubmissionopportunity

Penalty for latesubmission

Notes

Written Examination 1 1/2hours

2 100 August resitfor PGT students

Page 93: ,'.'' ,'0''sdb/ModSpecs/2012/PHYSmod...Lec 15&16 Wk 9 Damped and Forced Harmonic Oscillator Resonance PC 8 Wk 9 Demonstration Experiment, Prediction and Writeup Lec 17&18 Wk 10 Gravitation

only. Yr3 and Yr4students resit atthe next normalopportunity.

34. CONTINUOUS Duration Timing(Semester)

% of finalmark

Resit/resubmissionopportunity

Penalty for latesubmission

Notes

MODULE SPECIFICATION

The information contained in this module specification was correct at the time of publication but may be subject tochange, either during the session because of unforeseen circumstances, or following review of the module at the end ofthe session. Queries about the module should be directed to the member of staff with responsibility for the module.

1. Module Title RESEARCH SKILLS

2. Module Code PHYS491

3. Year 201213

4. OriginatingDepartment

Physics

5. Faculty Fac of Science & Engineering

6. Semester First Semester

7. Credit Level M Level

8. Credit Value 15

9. External Examiner Physics External Examiner

10. Member of staff withresponsibility for themodule

Dr TG Shears Physics [email protected]

11. Module Moderator Prof M Klein Physics [email protected]

12. Other ContributingDepartments

13. Other Staff Teachingon this Module

Prof C Collins Physics

14. Board of Studies Physics

15. Mode of Delivery Lectures/Classes

16. Location Main Liverpool City Campus

Lectures Seminars Tutorials Lab/Practicals Fieldwork/Placement Other TOTAL

17. ContactHours

12 6 75Group Project

93

18. Non-contact hours 5719. TOTAL HOURS 150

Lectures Seminars Tutorials Lab/Practicals Fieldwork/Placement Other

20. Timetable(if known)

21. Pre-requisites before taking this module (other modules and/or general educational/academic requirements):

None

22. Modules for which this module is a pre-requisite:

None

23. Co-requisite modules:

None

24. Linked Modules:

25. Programme(s) (including Year of Study) to which this module is available on a mandatory basis:

26. Programme(s) (including Year of Study) to which this module is available on a required basis:

Page 94: ,'.'' ,'0''sdb/ModSpecs/2012/PHYSmod...Lec 15&16 Wk 9 Damped and Forced Harmonic Oscillator Resonance PC 8 Wk 9 Demonstration Experiment, Prediction and Writeup Lec 17&18 Wk 10 Gravitation

Programme(s) (including Year of Study) to which this module is available on a required basis:

F303 (4) F521 (4)

27. Programme(s) (including Year of Study) to which this module is available on an optional basis:

MODULE DESCRIPTION

28. Aims

To help students acquire or improve some of the skills useful to the professional physicist. Skills covered include:

Planning research projects, performing literature searches, experimental designStatistical anlysis of dataCommunication with clients and with research collaborators

29. Learning Outcomes

At the end of the module the student should have:

Wide knowledge of probability distributionsSkilful use of estimatorsAbility to apply statistical tests to hypothesesUnderstand least squares techniques for parameter evaluationExperience of obtaining information, evaluating relevance and writing a scientific caseExperience of collaborative efforts to satisfy a clients requirements

30. Teaching and Learning Strategies

By applying statistical methods in realistic problem environments the students become familiar with modernresearch methods. They practive the writing of Scientific Reports. Group work teaches them how to functioneffectively in a team.

31. Syllabus

Statistical Analysis of Data

(Note that students will cover some or all of the following, depending on backgroundqualifications)

Describing the data, histograms, moments, variance, covarianceTheoretical distributions, binomial, Poisson, Gaussian, Chi-squaredErrors, accuracy, precision, central limit theorem, systematic errorsEstimation, liklihood functions, consistency, bias, efficiencyLeast squares method, straight line fit, parameter evaluationHypothesis testing, meaning of probability, confidence, significance, goodness offit

Key Skills

Report writing and presentation

Project

The project is an exercise in working within a group structure to devise and report on asolution to a simulated problem. The solution will require the application of physics

Groups will be of three or four students with an academic observer. Formal meetings willbe held to discuss approaches to the problem, assigning of individual tasks and co-ordinating the writing of the report.

The report will be assessed to give the same mark to each student but there will beindividual oral interviews on the project which will produce an additional individual mark.

32. Recommended Texts

"Statistics" by R J Barlow, published by Wiley

ASSESSMENT

33. EXAM Duration Timing(Semester)

% of finalmark

Resit/resubmissionopportunity

Penalty for latesubmission

Notes

34. CONTINUOUS Duration Timing

(Semester)% of finalmark

Resit/resubmissionopportunity

Penalty for latesubmission

Notes

Statistics ExamplesClass

1 20 Only in exceptionalcircumstances

N/A asassessment istimetabled

This work is notmarked anonymously

Statistics Class Test 1 hour 1 20 Only in exceptionalcircumstances

N/A asassessment istimetabled

This work is notmarked anonymously

Project Group Report 1 30 Only in exceptionalcircumstances

As universitypolicy

This work is notmarked anonymously

Project IndividualStudent Interview

1 30 Only in exceptionalcircumstances

N/A asassessment istimetabled

Anonymous markingimpossible

Page 95: ,'.'' ,'0''sdb/ModSpecs/2012/PHYSmod...Lec 15&16 Wk 9 Damped and Forced Harmonic Oscillator Resonance PC 8 Wk 9 Demonstration Experiment, Prediction and Writeup Lec 17&18 Wk 10 Gravitation

MODULE SPECIFICATION

The information contained in this module specification was correct at the time of publication but may be subject tochange, either during the session because of unforeseen circumstances, or following review of the module at the end ofthe session. Queries about the module should be directed to the member of staff with responsibility for the module.

1. Module Title ADVANCED PARTICLE PHYSICS

2. Module Code PHYS493

3. Year 201213

4. OriginatingDepartment

Physics

5. Faculty Fac of Science & Engineering

6. Semester Second Semester

7. Credit Level M Level

8. Credit Value 7.5

9. External Examiner Physics External Examiner

10. Member of staff withresponsibility for themodule

Prof TJV Bowcock Physics [email protected]

11. Module Moderator Prof JB Dainton Physics [email protected]

12. Other ContributingDepartments

13. Other Staff Teachingon this Module

14. Board of Studies Physics

15. Mode of Delivery Lectures/Tutorials

16. Location Main Liverpool City Campus

Lectures Seminars Tutorials Lab/Practicals Fieldwork/Placement Other TOTAL

17. ContactHours

16 2 18

18. Non-contact hours 5719. TOTAL HOURS 75

Lectures Seminars Tutorials Lab/Practicals Fieldwork/Placement Other

20. Timetable(if known)

21. Pre-requisites before taking this module (other modules and/or general educational/academic requirements):

None

22. Modules for which this module is a pre-requisite:

None

23. Co-requisite modules:

None

24. Linked Modules:

25. Programme(s) (including Year of Study) to which this module is available on a mandatory basis:

26. Programme(s) (including Year of Study) to which this module is available on a required basis:

Programme(s) (including Year of Study) to which this module is available on a required basis:

27. Programme(s) (including Year of Study) to which this module is available on an optional basis:

F303 (4) F521 (4)

MODULE DESCRIPTION

28. Aims

To build on the Year 3 module PHYS377 Particle PhysicsTo give the student a deeper understanding of the Standard Model of Particle Physics and the basicextensionsTo review the detectors and accelerator technology available to investigate the questions posed by theStandard Model and its extensions

29. Learning Outcomes

At the end of the module the student should have:

An understanding of the Standard Model and its extensions. This will be placed in context of theunderstanding of the origin of the universe, its properties and its physical lawsAn understanding of how present and future detector and accelerator technology will be applied toinvestigate the development of the Standard Model

30. Teaching and Learning Strategies

See Department of Physics Undergraduate Handbook

31. Syllabus

PHYS493 Feynman graphsSpontaneous symmetry breaking and the Higgs mechanismCP violation in the Standard ModelNeutrino Masses MixingSupersymmetryQuantum Gravity and the Brane WorldAstroParticle PhenomenologyIntroduction to Modern Experimental TechniquesCurrent and Future detectorsAccelerator Technology

32. Recommended Texts

Particle Physics: Due to the rapidly changing nature of the subject this section will be based around a set ofcourse notes

ASSESSMENT

33. EXAM Duration Timing(Semester)

% of finalmark

Resit/resubmissionopportunity

Penalty for latesubmission

Notes

Written Examination 1 1/2hours

2 100 August resitfor PGT studentsonly. Yr3 and Yr4students resit atthe next normalopportunity.

34. CONTINUOUS Duration Timing(Semester)

% of finalmark

Resit/resubmissionopportunity

Penalty for latesubmission

Notes

Page 96: ,'.'' ,'0''sdb/ModSpecs/2012/PHYSmod...Lec 15&16 Wk 9 Damped and Forced Harmonic Oscillator Resonance PC 8 Wk 9 Demonstration Experiment, Prediction and Writeup Lec 17&18 Wk 10 Gravitation

MODULE SPECIFICATION

The information contained in this module specification was correct at the time of publication but may be subject tochange, either during the session because of unforeseen circumstances, or following review of the module at the end ofthe session. Queries about the module should be directed to the member of staff with responsibility for the module.

1. Module Title COMPUTATIONAL ASTROPHYSICS

2. Module Code PHYS494

3. Year 201213

4. OriginatingDepartment

Physics

5. Faculty Fac of Science & Engineering

6. Semester Second Semester

7. Credit Level M Level

8. Credit Value 15

9. External Examiner Physics External Examiner

10. Member of staff withresponsibility for themodule

Dr S Kobayashi Physics [email protected]

11. Module Moderator Prof C Collins Physics

12. Other ContributingDepartments

13. Other Staff Teachingon this Module

14. Board of Studies Physics

15. Mode of Delivery Lectures/Practical

16. Location Main Liverpool City Campus

Lectures Seminars Tutorials Lab/Practicals Fieldwork/Placement Other TOTAL

17. ContactHours

11 25 33 2class test

71

18. Non-contact hours 7919. TOTAL HOURS 150

Lectures Seminars Tutorials Lab/Practicals Fieldwork/Placement Other

20. Timetable(if known)

At ARI, LJMU, Birkenhead

21. Pre-requisites before taking this module (other modules and/or general educational/academic requirements):

None

22. Modules for which this module is a pre-requisite:

None

23. Co-requisite modules:

None

24. Linked Modules:

25. Programme(s) (including Year of Study) to which this module is available on a mandatory basis:

26. Programme(s) (including Year of Study) to which this module is available on a required basis:

Programme(s) (including Year of Study) to which this module is available on a required basis:

F521 (4)

27. Programme(s) (including Year of Study) to which this module is available on an optional basis:

MODULE DESCRIPTION

28. Aims

To give students an understanding of Programming BasicsTo provide students with practical experience of using computational techniques extensively employed byresearchers in the physical sciences

29. Learning Outcomes

At the end of the module the student should have:

The ability to describe and discuss numerical modelingsA familiarity with a programming language used by research astronomers and its application in a researchcontextPractical experience of numerical used by scientists in analysis of theoretical problems and experimentaldata

30. Teaching and Learning Strategies

The physical principles of an practical approach to specific problems in astrophysics are explained in lectures,and then related computational mini-projects are given to the students. A 2hr class test on programming andapplication of numerical methods will provide an assessment on an individual basis, balancing the element ofgroup working inherent in the project elements of the course.

31. Syllabus

A series of lectures describing an astrophysical problem and the numerical techniquesthat can be used to address it, followed by a practical session in which students will usecomputers to carry out a mini-projects designed to accompany the lectures. Assessmentcomprises written reports on the projects, and a class test to assess understanding ofthe background astrophysics, and of the computational methods employed.

The elements covered will be drawn from a variety of observational and theoreticaltopics and will focus on numerical modelings and analysis.

Example topics include:

N-body simulations of self-gravitating systemsNumerical Hydrodynamics

32. Recommended Texts

Key references and hand-out notes will be provided by the lecturer

ASSESSMENT

33. EXAM Duration Timing(Semester)

% of finalmark

Resit/resubmissionopportunity

Penalty for latesubmission

Notes

34. CONTINUOUS Duration Timing

(Semester)% of finalmark

Resit/resubmissionopportunity

Penalty for latesubmission

Notes

Five assignments 2 70 Only in exceptionalcircumstances

As universitypolicy

This work is notmarked anonymously

Class test 2 hours 2 30 Only in exceptionalcircumstances

N/A asassessment istimetabled

This work is notmarked anonymously

Page 97: ,'.'' ,'0''sdb/ModSpecs/2012/PHYSmod...Lec 15&16 Wk 9 Damped and Forced Harmonic Oscillator Resonance PC 8 Wk 9 Demonstration Experiment, Prediction and Writeup Lec 17&18 Wk 10 Gravitation

MODULE SPECIFICATION

The information contained in this module specification was correct at the time of publication but may be subject tochange, either during the session because of unforeseen circumstances, or following review of the module at the end ofthe session. Queries about the module should be directed to the member of staff with responsibility for the module.

1. Module Title THE INTERSTELLAR MEDIUM

2. Module Code PHYS495

3. Year 201213

4. OriginatingDepartment

Physics

5. Faculty Fac of Science & Engineering

6. Semester First Semester

7. Credit Level M Level

8. Credit Value 15

9. External Examiner Physics External Examiner

10. Member of staff withresponsibility for themodule

Dr T Moore Physics [email protected]

11. Module Moderator Dr D Bersier Physics [email protected]

12. Other ContributingDepartments

13. Other Staff Teachingon this Module

14. Board of Studies Physics

15. Mode of Delivery Tutorials/Seminars

16. Location Main Liverpool City Campus

Lectures Seminars Tutorials Lab/Practicals Fieldwork/Placement Other TOTAL

17. ContactHours

24 24

18. Non-contact hours 12619. TOTAL HOURS 150

Lectures Seminars Tutorials Lab/Practicals Fieldwork/Placement Other

20. Timetable(if known)

21. Pre-requisites before taking this module (other modules and/or general educational/academic requirements):

Year 3 MPhys Astrophysics

22. Modules for which this module is a pre-requisite:

None

23. Co-requisite modules:

None

24. Linked Modules:

25. Programme(s) (including Year of Study) to which this module is available on a mandatory basis:

26. Programme(s) (including Year of Study) to which this module is available on a required basis:

Programme(s) (including Year of Study) to which this module is available on a required basis:

F521 (4)

27. Programme(s) (including Year of Study) to which this module is available on an optional basis:

MODULE DESCRIPTION

28. Aims

To build upon the student's appreciation of the role which the interstellar medium (ISM) plays in topics asstellar evolution (star-forming regions to supernova remnants) and galaxy evolutionTo provide a firm physical framework for this appreciation by investigating in detail the mechanisms whichgovern the structure and appearance of the ISM

29. Learning Outcomes

At the end of the module the student should have:

An understanding of the structure and evolution of the ISM and the relationship between its variouscomponentsThe ability to list the various types of observable phenomena and relate them to the structure of thevarious phases of the ISM and the physical process at workKnowledge of how observation, specifically spectroscopy, allows astronomers to understand the physicalconditions and chemical content of the ISM and thereby construct models of the interstellar medium andits relationship to the formation and evolution of stars and galaxies

30. Teaching and Learning Strategies

The module will be taught by directed reading and problem-solving. Students will be expected to read a sectionof a textbook and attempt a set of problems every week. The content and problems will be reviewed at weeklytutorial sessions. Traditional combination of lectures and tutorials. Practice in problem-solving by problem sheetsand tutorials. A set of assessed problem-solving exercises on the physics of the ISM (to take approximately 15hours of non-contact study time).

31. Syllabus

Review of Radiation Processes and Spectral Line emission

Spectral line formation. The interaction of a radiation field with matter. Radiative transfer

Physical Conditions in the ISM

The structure and phases of the Galactic interstellar medium. Photoionisation andrecombination in a pure hydrogen cloud (the HII region). The effects of including heliumand heavier elements. Energy balance and thermal equilibrium. Free-free radiation.Collisionally excited emission lines, permitted and forbidden. Recombination lines.Continuum emission processes. Molecular emission, lines

Spectral Diagnostics

Determination of electron temperatures and densities from atomic spectral line andcontinuum measurements. Determination of elemental abundances. Tracers of densemolecular gas; mass measurements

Scattering and Polarisation

Introduction to theory and application of scattering of light by small particles. Polarisationby scattering and dichroic absorption in reflection nebulae

Dust and Molecular Clouds

Formation and destruction of dust. Observable diagnostics. Formation of molecules ondust grains. Heating and cooling of molecular clouds. Molecular emission lines.Structure, dynamics, mechanical support and energy balance of molecular clouds.Magnetic fields, ambipolar diffusion, graviational contraction, star formation.

Introduction to Gas Dynamics

Sound waves and Alfven waves. Adiabatic and radiative shock waves. Expansion of

Page 98: ,'.'' ,'0''sdb/ModSpecs/2012/PHYSmod...Lec 15&16 Wk 9 Damped and Forced Harmonic Oscillator Resonance PC 8 Wk 9 Demonstration Experiment, Prediction and Writeup Lec 17&18 Wk 10 Gravitation

ionised regions. Stellar winds. Supernova remnants

32. Recommended Texts

"The Physics of the Interstellar Medium" by J E Dyson & D A Williams, published by IOP

Background Reading

"Physical Processes in the Interstellar Medium" L Spitzer, Wiley

"Astrophysics of Gaseous Nebulae and Active Galactic Nuclei" Osterbrock, University Science Books

"The Physics of Astrophysics" vols I & II, F Shu, University Science Books

"The Dusty Universe" A Evans, Ellis Horwood

"Accretion Processes in Star Formation" L Hartmann, CUP

ASSESSMENT

33. EXAM Duration Timing(Semester)

% of finalmark

Resit/resubmissionopportunity

Penalty for latesubmission

Notes

Written Examination 3 hours 1 70 August resit forPGT students only.Yr3 and Yr4students resit atthe next normalopportunity.

34. CONTINUOUS Duration Timing(Semester)

% of finalmark

Resit/resubmissionopportunity

Penalty for latesubmission

Notes

Written Assignment 1 30 Only in exceptionalcircumstances

As universitypolicy

This work is notmarked anonymously

MODULE SPECIFICATION

The information contained in this module specification was correct at the time of publication but may be subject tochange, either during the session because of unforeseen circumstances, or following review of the module at the end ofthe session. Queries about the module should be directed to the member of staff with responsibility for the module.

1. Module Title COMMUNICATION OF ASTROPHYSICAL IDEAS

2. Module Code PHYS496

3. Year 201213

4. OriginatingDepartment

Physics

5. Faculty Fac of Science & Engineering

6. Semester Whole Session

7. Credit Level M Level

8. Credit Value 15

9. External Examiner Physics External Examiner

10. Member of staff withresponsibility for themodule

Prof C Mundell Physics

11. Module Moderator Prof M Bode Physics [email protected]

12. Other ContributingDepartments

13. Other Staff Teachingon this Module

14. Board of Studies Physics

15. Mode of Delivery Lectures/Tutorials

16. Location Main Liverpool City Campus

Lectures Seminars Tutorials Lab/Practicals Fieldwork/Placement Other TOTAL

17. ContactHours

48 24 72

18. Non-contact hours 7819. TOTAL HOURS 150

Lectures Seminars Tutorials Lab/Practicals Fieldwork/Placement Other

20. Timetable(if known)

Students must attend 5 first-semesterresearch seminars and all firstsemester journal clubs. Note thatseminars are scheduled onWednesday afternoon

21. Pre-requisites before taking this module (other modules and/or general educational/academic requirements):

Year 3 MPhys Astrophysics

22. Modules for which this module is a pre-requisite:

None

23. Co-requisite modules:

None

24. Linked Modules:

Page 99: ,'.'' ,'0''sdb/ModSpecs/2012/PHYSmod...Lec 15&16 Wk 9 Damped and Forced Harmonic Oscillator Resonance PC 8 Wk 9 Demonstration Experiment, Prediction and Writeup Lec 17&18 Wk 10 Gravitation

25. Programme(s) (including Year of Study) to which this module is available on a mandatory basis:

26. Programme(s) (including Year of Study) to which this module is available on a required basis:

F521 (4)

27. Programme(s) (including Year of Study) to which this module is available on an optional basis:

MODULE DESCRIPTION

28. Aims

To develop the ability of the student to communicate results and ideas in astrophysics at a range oftechnical levels, dealing with the objective criticism of existing articles, videos, papers and lecture/semiarpresentations, as well as the creation of new materialTo help students bridge the gap between understanding undergraduate texts and dissecting a journalpaper, while at the same time emphasising the importance of being able to communicate ideas conciselyand clearly at a simpler level

29. Learning Outcomes

At the end of the module the student should have:

The ability to criticise objectively and constructively attempt to communicate astrophysical ideas at levelsranging from a local newspaper to research semiinars and papersAn appreciation of the qualities required to successfully explain astronomical ideas in contexts rangingfrom undergraduate teaching to research seminarsBeen able to create their own articles, observing-time applications, journal-club discussions, tutorialexercises, etc., building on the experience gained during the module

30. Teaching and Learning Strategies

The module will run throughout the year, so that students can attend the Astrophysics seminar and journal clubseries, formally supported by one-hour tutorials every week. In addition to the student-centred elements of themodule, students will be required to attend astrophysics research seminars given by invited speakers from otheruniversities and take part in journal clubs, including their own leading of a discussion of a recent paper.

31. Syllabus

PHYS496 The module will run throughout the year, formally supported by hour-long tutorials everyweek. During this period, in addition to the student-centred elements of the module,students will be required to attend astrophysics research seminars given by invitedspeakers from other universities, take part in journal clubs, including their own leading ofa discussion of a recent paper and observe staff members in an undergraduate teachingrole.

The syllabus will comprise:

Criticism of the popular and technical communication of astrophysics in: newspaperreports; articles in New Scientist; Scientific American; Physics Today; telescope timeproposals and grant proposals in general; short television interviews; videos designed forboth public information and education; research seminars and public lectures; a recentresearch paper from a refereed journal; writing and production of, for example, newpaperreports; popular articles; posters; television and radio interviews; telescope proposals;undergraduate laboratory and tutorial exercises; seminars and lectures

32. Recommended Texts

Popular science magazines (e.g. New Scientists, Physics Today, Scientific American), popular astronomymagazines (e.g. Astronomy Now, Sky & Telescope), newspapers (The Independent, the Liverpool Echo), TVprogrammes (e.g. Horizon, Equinox, Open University), research journals (e.g. Nature, Monthly Notices of theRoyal Astronomical Society, The Astrophysical Journal)

ASSESSMENT

33. EXAM Duration Timing(Semester)

% of final

Resit/resubmissionopportunity

Penalty for latesubmission

Notes

mark 34. CONTINUOUS Duration Timing

(Semester)% of finalmark

Resit/resubmissionopportunity

Penalty for latesubmission

Notes

Journal Club Notes 1 or 2 15 Only in exceptionalcircumstances

As universitypolicy

This work is notmarked anonymously

Journal ClubPresentation

1 or 2 25 Only in exceptionalcircumstances

N/A asassessment istimetabled

Anonymous markingimpossible

Seminar Notes 1 or 2 10 Only in exceptionalcircumstances

As universitypolicy

This work is notmarked anonymously

Telescope TimeAllocation Committee

1 or 2 15 Only in exceptionalcircumstances

N/A asassessment istimetabled

Anonymous markingimpossible

Telescope TimeProposal

1 or 2 20 Only in exceptionalcircumstances

As universitypolicy

This work is notmarked anonymously

Popular Article 1 or 2 15 Only in exceptionalcircumstances

As universitypolicy

This work is notmarked anonymously

Page 100: ,'.'' ,'0''sdb/ModSpecs/2012/PHYSmod...Lec 15&16 Wk 9 Damped and Forced Harmonic Oscillator Resonance PC 8 Wk 9 Demonstration Experiment, Prediction and Writeup Lec 17&18 Wk 10 Gravitation

MODULE SPECIFICATION

The information contained in this module specification was correct at the time of publication but may be subject tochange, either during the session because of unforeseen circumstances, or following review of the module at the end ofthe session. Queries about the module should be directed to the member of staff with responsibility for the module.

1. Module Title MAGNETIC STRUCTURE AND FUNCTION

2. Module Code PHYS497

3. Year 201213

4. OriginatingDepartment

Physics

5. Faculty Fac of Science & Engineering

6. Semester First Semester

7. Credit Level M Level

8. Credit Value 7.5

9. External Examiner Physics External Examiner

10. Member of staff withresponsibility for themodule

Prof WA Hofer Chemistry [email protected]

11. Module Moderator Dr HR Sharma Physics [email protected]

12. Other ContributingDepartments

13. Other Staff Teachingon this Module

14. Board of Studies Physics

15. Mode of Delivery Lectures/Tutorials

16. Location Main Liverpool City Campus

Lectures Seminars Tutorials Lab/Practicals Fieldwork/Placement Other TOTAL

17. ContactHours

16 2 18

18. Non-contact hours 5719. TOTAL HOURS 75

Lectures Seminars Tutorials Lab/Practicals Fieldwork/Placement Other

20. Timetable(if known)

21. Pre-requisites before taking this module (other modules and/or general educational/academic requirements):

PHYS363

22. Modules for which this module is a pre-requisite:

None

23. Co-requisite modules:

None

24. Linked Modules:

25. Programme(s) (including Year of Study) to which this module is available on a mandatory basis:

26. Programme(s) (including Year of Study) to which this module is available on a required basis:

Programme(s) (including Year of Study) to which this module is available on a required basis:

27. Programme(s) (including Year of Study) to which this module is available on an optional basis:

F303 (4) F521 (4)

MODULE DESCRIPTION

28. Aims

To build on the third year modules Condensed Matter PhysicsTo develop an understanding of the phenomena and fundamental mechanisms of magnetism incondensed matter

29. Learning Outcomes

At the end of the module the student should have:

A basic understanding of the quantum origin of the magnetism and magnetic momentsAn introduction to the Weiss molecular field theory of ferromagnetismA basic understanding of spin waves in ordered magnetsAn introduction to the techniques of neutron scattering and magnetic x-ray scatteringAn appreciation of simple magnetic structures and magnetic excitationsAn introduction to new magnetic materials

30. Teaching and Learning Strategies

See Department of Physics Undergraduate Handbook

31. Syllabus

Atomic structure basis for atomic magnetic moments in solidsDefinition of Magnetisation, magnetic susceptibility, diamagnetism,paramagnetism, Brillouin functionMagnetic moments of Rare Earth ions, Transition metal ionsCrystal field, quenching of orbital angular momentum in transition metal ions,Jahn-Teller effectMagnetic ordering, Mean Field Theory, M vs T curve, critical exponentsMechanisms of magnetic interaction, exchange interaction, direct exchange,superexchange, RKKY interactionMagnetic Anisotropy, magnetic structuresMagnetic excitations, magnonsMagnetometry, VSM, SQUID magnetometersNeutron diffraction, magnetic resonant x-ray diffractionMossbauer spectroscopyNew materials - magnetic multilayers

32. Recommended Texts

"Magnetism - Principles and Applications" by D Craik

ASSESSMENT

33. EXAM Duration Timing(Semester)

% of finalmark

Resit/resubmissionopportunity

Penalty for latesubmission

Notes

Written Examination 1 1/2hours

1 100 August resitfor PGT studentsonly. Yr3 and Yr4students resit atthe next normalopportunity.

34. CONTINUOUS Duration Timing(Semester)

% of finalmark

Resit/resubmissionopportunity

Penalty for latesubmission

Notes

Page 101: ,'.'' ,'0''sdb/ModSpecs/2012/PHYSmod...Lec 15&16 Wk 9 Damped and Forced Harmonic Oscillator Resonance PC 8 Wk 9 Demonstration Experiment, Prediction and Writeup Lec 17&18 Wk 10 Gravitation

MODULE SPECIFICATION

The information contained in this module specification was correct at the time of publication but may be subject tochange, either during the session because of unforeseen circumstances, or following review of the module at the end ofthe session. Queries about the module should be directed to the member of staff with responsibility for the module.

1. Module Title PROJECT (MPHYS)

2. Module Code PHYS498

3. Year 201213

4. OriginatingDepartment

Physics

5. Faculty Fac of Science & Engineering

6. Semester Whole Session

7. Credit Level M Level

8. Credit Value 30

9. External Examiner Physics External Examiner

10. Member of staff withresponsibility for themodule

Prof CA Lucas Physics [email protected]

11. Module Moderator Dr L Moran Physics [email protected]

12. Other ContributingDepartments

13. Other Staff Teachingon this Module

Dr SD Barrett Physics [email protected]

14. Board of Studies Physics

15. Mode of Delivery Project

16. Location Main Liverpool City Campus

Lectures Seminars Tutorials Lab/Practicals Fieldwork/Placement Other TOTAL

17. ContactHours

1 161 162

18. Non-contact hours 13819. TOTAL HOURS 300

Lectures Seminars Tutorials Lab/Practicals Fieldwork/Placement Other

20. Timetable(if known)

21. Pre-requisites before taking this module (other modules and/or general educational/academic requirements):

None

22. Modules for which this module is a pre-requisite:

None

23. Co-requisite modules:

None

24. Linked Modules:

25. Programme(s) (including Year of Study) to which this module is available on a mandatory basis:

26. Programme(s) (including Year of Study) to which this module is available on a required basis:

Programme(s) (including Year of Study) to which this module is available on a required basis:

F303 (4) F521 (4)

27. Programme(s) (including Year of Study) to which this module is available on an optional basis:

MODULE DESCRIPTION

28. Aims

To give students experience of working independently on an original problemTo give students an opportunity to be involved in scientific researchTo encourage learning, understanding and application of a particular physics subjectTo give students an opportunity to display qualities such as initiative and ingenuityTo improve students ability to keep daily records of the work in hand and its outcomesTo develop students' competence in scientific communication, both in oral and written form

29. Learning Outcomes

At the end of the module the student should have:

Experience of participation in planning all aspects of the workExperience researching literature and other sources of relevant informationExperience of the practical nature of physicsImproved practical and technical skills to carrying out physics investigationsAn ability to organise and manage timeAn ability to plan, execute and report on the results of an investigationImproved skills in preparing and delivering oral presentationsAn appreciation of a selected are of current physics research

30. Teaching and Learning Strategies

See Department of Physics Undergraduate Handbook

31. Syllabus

None.

32. Recommended Texts

None

ASSESSMENT

33. EXAM Duration Timing(Semester)

% of finalmark

Resit/resubmissionopportunity

Penalty for latesubmission

Notes

34. CONTINUOUS Duration Timing

(Semester)% of finalmark

Resit/resubmissionopportunity

Penalty for latesubmission

Notes

Project and Report(Supervisor)

2 50 Only in exceptionalcircumstances

As universitypolicy

This work is notmarked anonymously

Project Report(Second Academic)

2 30 Only in exceptionalcircumstances

As universitypolicy

This work is notmarked anonymously

Poster Presentation 180minutes

2 20 Only in exceptionalcircumstances

N/A asassessment istimetabled

Anonymous markingimpossible

Page 102: ,'.'' ,'0''sdb/ModSpecs/2012/PHYSmod...Lec 15&16 Wk 9 Damped and Forced Harmonic Oscillator Resonance PC 8 Wk 9 Demonstration Experiment, Prediction and Writeup Lec 17&18 Wk 10 Gravitation

MODULE SPECIFICATION

The information contained in this module specification was correct at the time of publication but may be subject tochange, either during the session because of unforeseen circumstances, or following review of the module at the end ofthe session. Queries about the module should be directed to the member of staff with responsibility for the module.

1. Module Title NANOSCALE PHYSICS AND TECHNOLOGY

2. Module Code PHYS499

3. Year 201213

4. OriginatingDepartment

Physics

5. Faculty Fac of Science & Engineering

6. Semester First Semester

7. Credit Level M Level

8. Credit Value 7.5

9. External Examiner Physics External Examiner

10. Member of staff withresponsibility for themodule

Dr VR Dhanak Physics [email protected]

11. Module Moderator Prof WA Hofer Chemistry [email protected]

12. Other ContributingDepartments

13. Other Staff Teachingon this Module

14. Board of Studies Physics

15. Mode of Delivery Lectures/Tutorials

16. Location Main Liverpool City Campus

Lectures Seminars Tutorials Lab/Practicals Fieldwork/Placement Other TOTAL

17. ContactHours

14 2 2 18

18. Non-contact hours 5719. TOTAL HOURS 75

Lectures Seminars Tutorials Lab/Practicals Fieldwork/Placement Other

20. Timetable(if known)

21. Pre-requisites before taking this module (other modules and/or general educational/academic requirements):

None

22. Modules for which this module is a pre-requisite:

None

23. Co-requisite modules:

None

24. Linked Modules:

25. Programme(s) (including Year of Study) to which this module is available on a mandatory basis:

26. Programme(s) (including Year of Study) to which this module is available on a required basis:

Programme(s) (including Year of Study) to which this module is available on a required basis:

27. Programme(s) (including Year of Study) to which this module is available on an optional basis:

F303 (4) F521 (4)

MODULE DESCRIPTION

28. Aims

To introduce the emerging fields of nanoscale physics and nanotechnologyTo describe experimental techniques for probing physical properties of nanostructured materialsTo describe the novel size-dependent electronic, optical, magnetic and chemical properties of nanoscalematerialsTo describe several `hot topics' in nanoscience researchTo develop students' problem-solving, investigative, communication and analytic skills throughappropriate assignments.

29. Learning Outcomes

At the end of the module the student should have:

Understanding of how and why nanoscale systems formUnderstanding of how nanoscale systems may be probed experimentallyUnderstanding of the physics of nanoscale systemsUnderstanding of the potential applications of nanoscale systems in nanotechnologyEnhanced problem-solving, investigative, communication and analytic skills developed throughappropriate assignments.

30. Teaching and Learning Strategies

See Department of Physics Undergraduate Handbook

31. Syllabus

Introduction and formation of nanostructures

Moore's law, Top-down vs bottom-up approaches to building nanostructuresNanolithography. Self-assembly of nanostructures. Atomic and molecularmanipulation

Techniques for probing nanostructures

STM and AFM, Photoemission, Photoluminescence, magnetic techniques

Novel properties of nanostructures

Electronic properties: quantum dots, quantum wires and quantum wellsOptical properties: plasmon resonances, luminescenceMagnetic properties`Tuning' of size-selected properties

Some hot topics in nanoscale science, e.g.

Magnetic nanoclusters and spintronicsCarbon-based nanomaterials (fullerenes and nanotubes) and molecularelectronicsAperiodic nanosystems

32. Recommended Texts

None available. References will be given to articles in research journals and popular science magazines.

ASSESSMENT

33. EXAM Duration Timing(Semester)

% of finalmark

Resit/resubmissionopportunity

Penalty for latesubmission

Notes

Page 103: ,'.'' ,'0''sdb/ModSpecs/2012/PHYSmod...Lec 15&16 Wk 9 Damped and Forced Harmonic Oscillator Resonance PC 8 Wk 9 Demonstration Experiment, Prediction and Writeup Lec 17&18 Wk 10 Gravitation

Written Examination 1 1/2hours

1 70 August resitfor PGT studentsonly. Yr3 and Yr4students resit atthe next normalopportunity.

34. CONTINUOUS Duration Timing(Semester)

% of finalmark

Resit/resubmissionopportunity

Penalty for latesubmission

Notes

Literature ProjectReport

1 15 Only in exceptionalcircumstances

As universitypolicy

This work is notmarked anonymously

Two SemesterReports

1 10 Only in exceptionalcircumstances

As universitypolicy

This work is notmarked anonymously

Oral Presentation 1 5 Only in exceptionalcircumstances

N/A asassessment istimetabled

Anonymous markingimpossible